Revit MEP 2010

Imperial Tutorial

March 2009

©

2009 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder. Disclaimer THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS. Trademarks The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Web Format, Discreet, DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG Extreme, DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, Ecotect, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, Face Robot, FBX, Filmbox, Fire, Flame, Flint, FMDesktop, Freewheel, Frost, GDX Driver, Gmax, Green Building Studio, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HumanIK, IDEA Server, i-drop, ImageModeler, iMOUT, Incinerator, Inferno, Inventor, Inventor LT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), Kynapse, Kynogon, LandXplorer, LocationLogic, Lustre, Matchmover, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, Moonbox, MotionBuilder, Movimento, Mudbox, NavisWorks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials, RasterDWG, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, REALVIZ, Recognize, Render Queue, Retimer,Reveal, Revit, Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, Smoke, Softimage, Softimage|XSI (design/logo), SteeringWheels, Stitcher, Stone, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, TrustedDWG, ViewCube, Visual, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Landscape, Visual Survey, Visual Toolbox, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, Vtour, Wire, Wiretap, WiretapCentral, XSI, and XSI (design/logo). The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner,Multi-Master Editing, River, and Sparks. The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of MoldflowCorp. in the USA and/or other countries: Moldflow, MPA, MPA (design/logo),Moldflow Plastics Advisers, MPI, MPI (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Insight,MPX, MPX (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Xpert. Third Party Software Program Credits ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™. WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002). Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved. ETABS is a registered trademark of Computers and Structures, Inc. ETABS © copyright 1984-2005 Computers and Structures, Inc. All rights reserved. RISA is a trademark of RISA Technologies. RISA-3D copyright © 1993-2005 RISA Technologies. All rights reserved.

Portions relating to JPEG © Copyright 1991-1998 Thomas G. Lane. All rights reserved. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Portions relating to TIFF © Copyright 1997-1998 Sam Leffler. © Copyright 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. All rights reserved. The Tiff portions of this software are provided by the copyright holders and contributors “as is” and any express or implied warranties, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties or merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed. In no event shall the copyright owner or contributors of the TIFF portions be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the use of the TIFF portions of this software, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. Portions of Libtiff 3.5.7 Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler. Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that (i) the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related documentation, and (ii) the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the software without the specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics. Portions of Libxml2 2.6.4 Copyright © 1998-2003 Daniel Veillard. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notices and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. Government Use Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

Contents

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
What is in the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Chapter 2

Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Understanding the Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Using the Revit MEP User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Parts of the Revit Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Modifying the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Performing Common Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Chapter 3

Getting Started with MEP Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Creating an MEP Project . . . . . . . . . . Linking Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying a View Template . Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . Modifying General System Options . Specifying File Locations . . . . . . Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 . 30 . 34 . 35 . 35 . 36 . 39 . 40

Creating a Mechanical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Preparing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Placing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Placing a Space in an Open Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

v

Placing a Multi-Level Space . . . . . . . Viewing Zones in the System Browser . . Creating Zones on a Single Level . . . . Creating Zones on Multiple Levels . . . Working with the Analytical Model . . . Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads . Creating a Zone Color Scheme . . . . . Creating an Airflow Schedule . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. 56 . 59 . 60 . 62 . 64 . 69 . 72 . 75

Chapter 5

Designing Mechanical Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Placing Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems . . . . . . . . . Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems . Manually Creating Ductwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 . . 85 . . 92 . . 94 . 102

Chapter 6

Designing a Mechanical Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Adding Mechanical Equipment . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout . . Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout . Adding Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . Sizing Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspecting the System . . . . . . . Checking Piping Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 . 114 . 119 . 128 . 142 . 146 . 149 . 151

Creating an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Specifying Electrical Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Defining Required Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Creating Color Fills and Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

Chapter 8

Designing an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills . Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures . . . . . . . . . Placing Switches, Junction Boxes, and Receptacles . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Switch System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Power Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Panel Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking Your Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 . 177 . 183 . 193 . 200 . 204 . 207 . 211 . 213 . 214

Creating a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Chapter 10

Designing a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Creating a Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

vi | Contents

Refining the Sanitary Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Creating the Cold Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Creating the Hot Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

Creating a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Specifying Pipe Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Determining Zone Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

Chapter 12

Designing a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Adding Sprinklers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . Completing the Fire Protection Wet System . Adding Vertical Supply Piping . . . . . . . . Modifying Pipe Diameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 . 284 . 289 . 294 . 299

Documenting a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Duplicating Plan Views . . . . . . . . Creating Dependent Views . . . . . . Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser . Creating Callout Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 . 308 . 311 . 315

Chapter 14

Working with Annotations and Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Creating Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 Creating a Legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

Chapter 15

Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail . Creating Detail Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail . . . . . . . . Drafting Detail Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing a CAD Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 . 338 . 348 . 353 . 364

Contents | vii

viii .

you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to access the tutorial training files. You also learn how to use the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 user interface to perform common tasks. 1 . Finally.Introduction In this tutorial. you learn how to create and set up an MEP project.

2 .

and plumbing engineering workflows. such as duct. Add more detailed modelling elements. Expand a title for a list of lessons in the tutorial. The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit MEP. you learn how to design a building information model (BIM) in Revit MEP. and piping. electrical panels. 3 .Using the Tutorials 1 This lesson provides information on how to get started with the Revit® MEP 2010 tutorials. including an overview of the building information model that you design in the tutorials. The technical training facility you design was a product of a design competition in Munich. This building is also used as the model in the Revit® Architecture and Revit® Structure 2010 tutorials. The Contents tab of the Revit MEP Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. Germany. and where to find the training files required to complete the exercises. How the tutorials are organized The tutorials are designed to follow the typical mechanical. electrical. NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit MEP. and plumbing fixtures. What is in the Tutorials In these tutorials. You complete the following phases of design: ■ ■ ■ Import the architectural floor plan in either a 2D (DWG) or a 3D (RVT) format. fixtures. such as mechanical equipment. Expand a lesson title for a list of exercises in the lesson. Add basic MEP elements.

all content used in the tutorials is installed in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files. Create detail views. when you add ductwork. Metric file names have an _m suffix. to provide a richer and more finished design. After completing each exercise. templates. You do not design entire systems. Each training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. you can complete any exercise without first completing the preceding exercises. The tutorial exercises are designed to be basic and brief. For example. Contact your CAD manager for more information. For example. Metric: files for users working with metric units. When you install the training files as instructed. however. On the Contents tab. However. When you open a training file. the exercises and lessons can be completed in any order. In this exercise. and sheets to document the project. but only enough of a system to learn how to use the tools and options in the product. The tutorials include a Training File section that references the training file to be used with the tutorial. the tutorials are grouped and presented in a recommended order for optimal learning.■ ■ ■ Analyze systems and refine MEP elements. Locate the training files The Tutorials option on the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 Help menu provides a link to the installation website for the tutorial content and training files. views. as well as how to open and save them. These elements enhance the exercises you complete. IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials. Accessing Training Files Training files are Revit MEP projects. and families that were created specifically for use with the tutorials. Training files are grouped into 2 folders within the Training folder: ■ ■ Imperial: files for users working with imperial units. you can choose to save your work. Imperial file names have an _i suffix. such as templates and families. you learn where the training files are located. your Training folder may be in a different location. Open a training file 1 Click ➤ Open. 4 | Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . So. annotations. they are copied to the default location C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2010\Training. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system. you may notice that MEP elements are included that were not specifically added in an exercise. it is recommended that you begin each exercise by opening the training provided. elements such as additional ductwork and equipment are incorporated into subsequent training files. The training files include a starting point for each tutorial exercise. NOTE Depending on your installation. Use the training files A training file is a Revit MEP project that defines a building information model and views of the model that are used to complete the steps in a tutorial. and tags. Create schedules. you only draw the duct in one wing of the building. is located and accessed in the training files location.

NOTE You are not required to save your work in a training file. if you open settings.rvt and make changes. If you click the arrow to the right of the Open option. double-click Imperial or Metric. For File name. you are prompted to save the changes.NOTE If you click the word Open in the menu. You may close the file with or without saving changes. select the folder in which to save the new file. depending on the instructions in the tutorial. and click Open. Click a file type to display the Open dialog for the specified file type. you should save this file with a new name such as settings_modified. Save a training file 5 To save a training file with a new name. verify that Project Files (*. and click the Training Files icon. You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location. a list of file types displays. enter the new file name. and you can open any supported file type. click ➤ Save As. For example. scroll down. A good practice is to save the training file with a unique name after you have made changes.rvt) is selected. ■ ■ Close a training file 7 Click ➤ Close. 3 In the right pane. Accessing Training Files | 5 . For Files of type. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. the Open dialog displays. 6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog: ■ For Save in. A training file is provided as a starting point for each exercise. 4 Click the training file name.rvt. 8 If you have made changes. and click Save.

6 .

hence. quantities. Understanding the Concepts What is Autodesk Revit MEP 2010? The Revit MEP platform for building information modelling is a design and documentation system that supports the design. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. the floor or roof remains connected.Understanding the Basics 2 In this lesson. ■ ■ 7 . and plans. Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. the operation of the software is parametric. The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved. 2D and 3D view. drawings. you learn what Revit MEP is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work. sections. You begin with the fundamental concepts on which Revit MEP is built. scope. and Revit MEP coordinates that change through the entire project. In this case. This capability delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit MEP: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project. In mathematics and mechanical CAD. You learn the terminology. In the Revit MEP model. and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. In this case. the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. The following are examples of these element relationships: ■ The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. Revit MEP collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. drawing sheets. If you move the partition. As you work in drawing and schedule views. the door retains this relationship to the partition. the parameter is one of association or connection. and how to perform some common tasks in the product. the hierarchy of elements. What is meant by parametric? The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the design that enable the coordination and change management that Revit MEP provides. If the length of the elevation is changed. schedules. the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters. and phases when you need it. The Revit MEP parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views. Building information modelling (BIM) delivers information about project design. and schedules required for a building project. every drawing sheet.

■ There are 2 types of view-specific elements: ■ Annotation elements are 2D components that document the model and maintain scale on paper. Revit MEP uses 3 types of elements: ■ Model elements represent the actual 3D geometry of the building. dimensions. sprinklers.How does Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 keep things updated? A fundamental characteristic of a building information modelling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. grids. sprinklers. without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design. Element behavior in a parametric modeler In projects. Model components are all the other types of elements in the building model. sinks. tags. When you change something. View-specific elements display only in the views in which they are placed. The second is its approach to propagating building changes. boilers. Details are 2D items that provide details about the building model in a particular view. For example. They help to describe or document the design. filled regions. sinks. Datum elements help to define project context. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. and 2D detail components are view-specific elements. Revit MEP uses 2 key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. and electrical panels. Revit MEP immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. For example. and keynotes are annotation elements. levels. Examples include detail lines. ■ 8 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . The result of these concepts is software that works like you do. tags. For example. walls and ceilings are hosts. They display in relevant views of the design. and 2D detail components. For example. and reference planes are datum elements. ducts. For example. ducts. boilers. dimensions. ■ ■ There are 2 types of model elements: ■ Hosts (or host elements) are generally built in place at the construction site. and electrical panels. For example. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links.

and types. Understanding the following terms is crucial to understanding the software.This implementation provides flexibility for designers. such as roofs. You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building. schedules. top of wall. you add Revit MEP parametric building elements to the design. categories of model elements include mechanical equipment and air terminals. by locking a dimension or aligning to walls. and so forth). Category: A category is a group of elements that you use to model or document a building design. and drawings of the design. industry-standard terms familiar to most engineers. This information includes components used to design the model. Project: In Revit MEP. the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model. Understanding the Concepts | 9 . Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. In Revit MEP. To place levels. you can explicitly control them. Revit MEP elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly. North . programming is not required. you do nothing to establish these relationships. Categories of annotation elements include tags and symbols. For example. they are implied by what you do and how you draw. you must be in a section or elevation view. for example. some terms are unique to Revit MEP. By using a single project file. views of the project. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. elevation views. section views. you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a structure. you can define new parametric elements in Revit MEP. Understanding Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 terms Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit MEP are common. Often. The project file contains all information for the building design. Most often. Revit MEP makes it easy for you to alter the design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views. families. or bottom of foundation. from geometry to construction data. first floor. the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the structure.Elevation View Element: When creating a project. Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements. In other cases. floors. and ceilings. If you can draw. Revit MEP classifies elements by categories. However.

System families can be transferred between projects. For example. Unlike system and standard component families. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family. You can also display several project views at one time. Type: Each family can have several types. System families include ducts. you cannot duplicate in-place family types to create multiple types. ■ Because in-place families are intended for limited use in a project. Parts of the Revit Interface The Revit MEP interface is designed to simplify your workflow. pipes. the behavior of a plumbing fitting is predefined in the system. However. such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. and rearranging interface components to support the way that you work. and you can place copies of the same in-place family element in your projects. although the pendant lights that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. Using the Revit MEP User Interface Revit MEP is a powerful CAD product for the Microsoft® Windows operating system. Instance: Instances are the actual items (individual elements) that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the design (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances). They are not available for loading or creating as separate files. you can set the ribbon to one of the three display settings for optimum use of the interface. For example. identical use. A type can also be a style. hiding. such as a 30” X 42” title block. each in-place family contains only a single type. A type can be a specific size of a family. Create an in-place family when your project needs unique geometry that you do not expect to reuse or geometry that must maintain one of more relationships to other project geometry. You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. and wires. There are 3 kinds of families: ■ Loadable families can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. A family groups elements with a common set of parameters (properties). ■ ■ In-place families are custom families that you create in the context of a project. showing. a lighting fixture could be considered one family. you can create different types of fittings with different compositions. ■ ■ ■ Revit MEP predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. Then experiment with them. For example. 10 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics .Family: Families are classes of elements in a category. Read the following topics to familiarize yourself with the basic parts of the Revit interface. you can change the interface to better support the way that you work. Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties. With a few clicks. or layer the views to see only the one on top. You can create multiple in-place families in your projects. Its interface resembles those of other products for Windows featuring a ribbon that contains the tools used to complete tasks. and similar graphical representation.

Parts of the Revit Interface | 11 . or moving a panel off the ribbon to your desktop. 2 The minimize behavior cycles through the following minimize options: ■ ■ ■ Show Full Ribbon: Shows entire ribbon. To return the panel to the ribbon.Ribbon Overview The ribbon displays automatically when you create or open a file. Minimize to Panel Tiles: Shows tab and panel labels. Click the other side to expose a list of other related tools. Customize the ribbon by changing the panel order. Ribbon Tabs and Panels TIP When you see a button that shows a line dividing it into two sides. To move panels: ■ ■ Click a panel label and drag the panel to a desired place on the ribbon. click the Return Panels to Ribbon button. Click a panel label and drag the panel off the ribbon to the desktop. Minimize to Tabs: Shows tab labels. To minimize the ribbon 1 Click (Show Full Ribbon) to the right of the ribbon tabs. you can click the top (or left) side to access the tool you probably use most often. The ribbon can be minimized for maximum use of the drawing area. and provides all the tools necessary to create your file. or drag the panel back to its original ribbon tab.

Examples of button that can be clicked on two sides The following table describes the ribbon tabs and the types of commands they contain. and CAD files. select the tool first. many of the tools you need to create and modify a family of elements. tools used for editing existing elements. project and system parameters. and for switching views.. data and systems. The Add-Ins tab is enabled only when a third-party tool is installed. and settings. tools used for running analysis on the current design. many of the tools you need to create the MEP design. tools for collaboration with internal and external project team members. tools to add and manage secondary items such as raster images. architect-specific tools. tools used for adding 2D information to a design. tools used for managing and modifying the current view. third-party tools used with Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. Create (family files only) Insert Annotate Modify Analyze Architect Collaborate View Manage Add-Ins 12 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . When working on the Modify tab.. then select what you want to modify. There are a number of button types on the ribbon Ribbon Tab Home Includes commands for.

click the push pin icon in the bottom-left corner of the expanded panel. Element: contains Element Properties and the Type Selector. A dialog-launcher arrow on the bottom of a panel opens a dialog. displays information related to the current state of a Revit operation. To keep a panel expanded. when adding duct. provides access to common tools. a special contextual ribbon tab displays that contains a set of tools that relate only to the context of the command. provides requested information. a Place Duct contextual tab displays that has three panels: ■ ■ ■ Selection: contains the Modify command. an expanded panel closes automatically when you click another panel. This contextual ribbon tab closes once you end the command. The application frame consists of five main areas described in the following table: Application Window Tool Description opens the application menu (single -click). displays frequently used tools. application button application menu Quick Access toolbar InfoCenter Status Bar Parts of the Revit Interface | 13 . closes the application menu (double-click).Expanded Panels A drop-down arrow at the bottom of a panel indicates that you can expand the panel to display additional tools and controls. For example. Application Frame Overview The application frame contains tools and provides feedback to help you manage your Revit MEP projects. Contextual Ribbon Tabs When you execute certain commands or select an element. By default. Placement Tools: contains the placement tools necessary for placing and connecting duct.

Click to access the application menu and perform the following actions: to. such as Export and Publish. Access common tools to start or publish a file in the application menu. (Open) save the current drawing. NOTE Revit MEP options are set from Options on the application menu.The Application Menu The application menu provides access to many common file actions and also allows you to manage your files using more advanced commands.. (Save) save the current drawing with a new name... (New) 14 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics .. (Export) On the application menu. select a template and create a new drawing. click. select a file to open. (Save As) export the current drawing.

family. publish the current project. annotation. (Licensing) close the file. NOTE New displays on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down. saves a current project. click. or template file. or template file. provides views including Default 3D. (Save) (Undo) (Redo) (Modify) (Synchronize and Modify Settings) (3D View) (Customize Quick Access Toolbar) Parts of the Revit Interface | 15 .On the application menu. to. family. (Publish) print the current drawing. To enable or disable a tool item. customizes the items displayed on the Quick Access toolbar... Camera. click next to it on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down. and Walkthrough. cancels the last action by default and displays a list of all actions taken during the session. synchronizes a local file with that on the central server. (Close) Using the Quick Access Toolbar The Quick Access toolbar contains the following items by default: Quick Access Toolbar Item (Open) Description opens a project. annotation. (Print) access product and license information.. reinstates the last cancelled action and displays a list of all reinstated actions performed during the session. but is not enabled by default.. enters selection mode and ends the current operation.

the Status Bar displays the name of the family and type. Starting with the most recent command. these items do not display and need to be re-added to the Quick Access toolbar. Group. However. workshared components. When you are highlighting an element or component. The Quick Access toolbar can display below the ribbon. Clipboard. the left side of the Status Bar provides tips or hints on what to do. when you switch to another editing mode. items that are added to the Quick Access toolbar from the Create. click the drop-down to the right of the Undo and Redo buttons. Editable Only: Filters selections to select only editable. Status Bar The Status Bar is located along the bottom of the Revit MEP application frame. check the Status Bar. Modify. Getting Hints About What to Do Next If you start a command (such as Rotate) and are not sure what to do next. NOTE There are some tools on contextual tabs that cannot be added to the Quick Access toolbar. In addition. you can select any number of previous commands to include in the Undo or Redo operation. Clear the Status Bar check mark. Several other controls appear on the right side of the Status Bar ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Press & Drag: Allows you to click and drag an element without it selecting first. Click Show Below the Ribbon on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar to change the display setting. When you are using a command. or the Family Editor. repeat the command. To hide the Status Bar. Filter button: Displays how many elements are selected and refines the element categories selected in a view. Active Only: Filters selections to select only active design option components. click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down. a tool tip appears next to the cursor. displaying the same information. While in an edit mode (such as Modify Electrical Fixtures). 16 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . This displays the command history in a list. Exclude Options: Filters selections to exclude components that are part of a design option. or View Graphics panels persist on the toolbar for that mode. To show the Status Bar again.To undo or redo a series of operations. It often displays tips or hints about what to do next for the current command.

do either of the following: ■ ■ Press ESC twice. select one or more elements of the same category. use the Type Selector to specify the type of element to add. Then use the Type Selector to select the desired type. Its contents change depending on the current function or selected elements. click (Modify). for example. View Control Bar The View Control Bar is located at the bottom of the Revit window above the Status Bar. Type Selector The Type Selector is located on the Element panel for the currently invoked tool. It provides quick access to functions that affect the drawing area.To cancel or exit the current command. Options Bar The Options Bar is located below the ribbon. Place a Wall. To change existing elements to a different type. including the following: Parts of the Revit Interface | 17 . When you place an element in a drawing. On the Quick Access toolbar. Its contents change depending on the current command or selected element.

In the following steps. you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window. For example. it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. The 3D isometric view displays: 3 Click Navigation bar ➤ Zoom In Region drop-down to display the zoom menu. click Training Files. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_i. 1 Click ➤ Open. 18 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . Zoom the view In the tutorials. (The Navigation bar is located in the top-right corner of the view.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Scale Detail Level Model Graphics Style Shadows On/Off Show/Hide Rendering Dialog (Available only when the drawing area displays a 3D view. Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the MEP design in the window. There are several ways to access zoom options. you learn how to modify the views within your Revit MEP project. you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire structure or floor plan in the view. Crop View On/Off Show/Hide Crop Region Temporary Hide/Isolate Reveal Hidden Elements Modifying the View In this exercise. you open a training file and practice adjusting the view with the different zoom commands.) The zoom menu lists the zoom options. After you are familiar with these tasks.rvt. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog.

6 Click in the drawing area. use a zoom menu command to zoom out. on the Navigation bar. 7 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region to magnify. and enter the shortcut ZR to zoom in on a region. The cursor becomes a magnifying glass. Zoom is also available using SteeringWheels. the view zooms out from the mechanical piping design. you can roll the wheel to zoom the view. click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. NOTE As you zoom in and out. SteeringWheels provide 2D and 3D navigation tools. 9 To display SteeringWheels. the view zooms in on the selected area. Modifying the View | 19 . this is referred to as a crossing selection. 4 Click Zoom Out (2x). The view of the MEP design is sized to fit the available window. click . When you release the mouse button. Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire structure again. In the drawing area. 5 Click Zoom To Fit. NOTE If the Navigation bar is not currently displayed click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and select Navigation bar. To modify or add snap increments. 8 If you use a mouse that has a wheel as the middle button. If you do not have a wheel mouse.NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself activates the currently-selected zoom command. Revit MEP uses the largest snap increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area.

press F1 while the steering wheel is displayed. Reorient the view You can use the View Cube in 3D views to spin the design or reorient the view 15 Place the mouse cursor over the South compass portion of the ViewCube to highlight the direction indicator. 11 Click and hold the mouse button. the wheel follows the cursor around the drawing area. You can change the pivot point by releasing the mouse button. 13 Drag the cursor up or right to zoom in. and then using the Zoom tool again. click the SteeringWheels tab. To define settings for SteeringWheels. For more information about SteeringWheels. click 16 Click the Top compass direction indicator to switch to a Top view of the design. 10 Move the cursor over the Zoom wedge of the wheel so that it highlights. 12 Drag the cursor down or left to zoom out. 20 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . As you move the mouse. Click and drag to orbit the design.The Full Navigation wheel displays in the drawing area. moving the wheel to the desired location. press ESC. The cursor displays a pivot point for the Zoom tool. ➤ Options. and click tin the Options dialog. 14 To exit the wheel.

Design ➤ Floor Plans. Resize an element using drag controls 1 In the Project Browser. and open Level 2 . it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. called drag controls. 2 Enter ZR. When drawing or modifying an MEP design. Performing Common Tasks | 21 . bottoms. Performing Common Tasks In this exercise. zoom in on the upper-left corner of the floor plan.HVAC Plan . as shown. and select the duct. referred to as shape handles. Small blue dots. it is important to understand how to adjust the size of components in the drawing area. Similar controls. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . display at the ends of selected objects in a plan view. After you are familiar with these tasks. Notice the small blue dots that display at both ends of the duct.Design. These are the drag controls.17 Click the Home icon to return to the original view. you learn to perform some of the common Revit MEP tasks that are included in the tutorials. and tops of selected elements in elevation views and 3D views. display along the ends.

The Undo command allows you to reverse the effects of one or more commands. on the Standard toolbar. In this example. Move. click the Undo command. or press CTRL+Z.3 Click and drag the bottom control. 4 Click in the drawing area to deselect the duct. 22 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . moving the cursor up to shorten the duct. select the first item in the list. Selecting the second item in the list will undo the last 2 actions. All changes you make to a project are tracked. 6 On the Undo menu. Undo commands 5 On the Quick Access toolbar. click the drop-down menu next to (Undo). Move an element 7 Select the same duct used in the previous steps. you decide that you prefer to leave the duct as is. NOTE To quickly undo the previous action. All commands are canceled up to and including the selected command.

and drag it to the left as shown. click to specify the starting position. After selecting the element to move.8 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. 11 With the duct already selected. 9 Click the midpoint of the duct. you want to move the duct. and click again to specify the ending position. for example. The duct is moved to the new position. such as Move and Copy. Some commands. require 2 clicks to complete the command. In this case. 10 Move the cursor to the right. Another way to move an element is to select it and drag it to a new location. Performing Common Tasks | 23 . as shown.

Notice that the return air duct is not displayed. stay active or current until you choose another command or end the current command.End a command Some commands. 13 To end a command. For example. under Visibility: ■ ■ ■ Clear Mechanical . Click OK. (Undo) to redisplay the 24 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . Press ESC twice. 15 On the Filters tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. Override the display of objects You can control the visibility of objects in a view to display objects in specific ways.Supply. 16 On the Quick Access toolbar. you can specify visibility settings for specific elements in an HVAC plan in order to enable the display of supply duct and disable the display of return duct. you can also: ■ ■ Choose another command. 14 Enter VG. click the drop-down menu next to supply return air duct.Return. such as the Modify Ducts command. 12 Click Modify tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Select Mechanical .

17 Close the file without saving your changes. Performing Common Tasks | 25 .

26 .

Creating an MEP Project In this exercise. Finally. New projects inherit all the families. You also learn how to use collaboration tools. under Create new. You may need to have a variety of office templates if your work requires it. and geometry from the starting template. and loadable families. such as ducts and pipes. You can choose from several templates. Start a project from an existing template 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project.Getting Started with MEP Projects 3 In this lesson you learn how to start a project from a template. you learn how to organize the project browser to make it easy to view and access your project files.rte template. the default building levels and standard views. 6 Click OK. 27 . or you can save a project and use it as a new project template. you can modify one template and use Transfer Project Standards to copy the changes to the other templates. use copy/monitor. 4 Select the i_Tutorial-Default. under Template file. 2 In the New Project dialog. such as coordination review and interference checking. and open Imperial ➤ Templates. and click Open. click Browse. link files. system families. 5 In the New Project dialog. click Training files. The first step in creating your office template is deciding which template to use as your starting point. create and manage views. settings. You then learn how to customize the template by modifying the project settings and discipline settings. such as the default project units and settings. you learn how to start a project from a template. In that case. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. select Project. A project template enables you to start a project by providing initial conditions. and modify system settings. You can either select a template from the template library. The template selection may vary depending on your installation.

navigate to Imperial Templates. select Sub-Discipline and click Modify. For example. you can select it now. 13 In the New Project dialog: Under Template file. Notice that construction template is more complex than the default template and the view properties have been modified to maximize the use of various tools. ■ For Building Construction. you can select the materials commonly used in most projects. 15 In the Instance Properties dialog. 17 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. Modify project settings Project settings control the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project. Click Cancel. select Level 1. 10 Using the same method. review the construction materials listed. 9 Close the file with or without saving it. NH. for City. If you want to use a template other than the default. and open North. In the Choose Template dialog. 14 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information. and select the Systems-Default_Imperial. (Browse). click (Browse).rte template and click Open. ■ ■ For Ground Plane. Click OK. select School or University. click Edit. under Energy Analysis. To maintain office standards and reduce rework. create another new project using the Construction template.7 In the Project Browser. zoom to right side of the drawing area to view the level heads. For Location. In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ On the Place tab. 18 In the Project Parameters dialog. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). Click OK twice. click ■ ■ In the Building Construction dialog. select Manchester. you can dictate its appearance in all views and when rendered. Some templates are simple with respect to the predefined views and schedules. select Project template. TIP This template is the starting point for your new template. you can establish settings that are common to most projects. 28 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . When you select the material. for Energy Data. click Browse. ■ ■ Under Create new. Create a new project template based on the default systems template 12 Click ■ ■ ➤ New ➤ Project. 16 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. 8 In the drawing area.

clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. under Duct Settings. 25 In the left pane.rfa and I_Long Wire Tick Mark. Modify mechanical settings Revit MEP has discipline settings that define the appearance and behavior of the system components in a project. ensure that Hook Wire Tick Mark is selected. Holding CTRL. click Sizes. click Rectangular. and 5 1/2". under Pipe Settings. Mechanical settings determine the behavior and appearance of the ductwork and piping for mechanical. For Neutral Wire Tick Mark. select Identity Data. 4 1/2". 32 In the right pane: ■ ■ ■ For Hot Wire Tick Mark. After standard settings have been established for an organization. Define the tick marks that are used on wires by loading a family. and fire protection systems. 5 1/2". and 12 1/2". under Duct Settings. 26 In the right pane.rfa and click Open. for 3/4". piping. For Ground Wire Tick Mark. ensure that Long Wire Tick Mark is selected. 10 1/2". clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. Modify electrical settings Electrical settings determine the voltage. 27 Click OK. For Categories. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. ensure that Long Wire Tick Mark is selected. 29 In the Load Family dialog: ■ ■ Browse to the Imperial Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks folder. 22 In the right pane. 23 In the left pane. they can be configured in a template file to avoid having to set them for each project. 20 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings. plumbing. for 3 1/2". wiring. Discipline settings can be defined for electrical and mechanical disciplines. 11 1/2". 31 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. click Wiring. 21 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog.19 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Group parameter under. select I_Hook Wire Tick Mark. 28 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family. for 3 1/2". click Round. Click OK twice. power distribution systems. 4 1/2". 33 Click OK. 30 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. Creating an MEP Project | 29 . 24 In the right pane. Duct sizes that are not commonly used are removed from the sizing lists to avoid having them created when sizing or laying out ducts. select Views. and demand factors for electrical systems.

Close coordination between the two models is essential because the building envelope changes will directly affect the MEP design. you can specify the order in which the views and sheets are displayed in the Project Browser. You can use these techniques to create templates that are customized to your projects. 35 On the Views tab of the Browser Organization dialog. 7 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. 30 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . You need to create the MEP model for the project. under Create new. 37 Save this file to a location on your local system. click Training. click Browse. In addition. 36 On the Folders tab of the Browser Organization Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Group by. select Project. Link a file 6 Click Insert tab ➤ Link panel ➤ Link Revit.Origin to Origin. To enable this coordination. you link a Revit Architecture project to a Revit MEP project. families.rvt.Organize the Project Browser The Project Browser lists all the views. An architect has created a preliminary architectural model for a building project using Revit Architecture. 5 Click OK. 38 Close the file. 3 Select the template you saved in the previous exercise and click Open. For Then by. Create a new project using the template created in the previous lesson 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project. Click Open. 2 In the New Project dialog. For Sort by. You can also set filters to determine the number of views and sheets that are displayed. 4 In the New Project dialog. For Then by. select Type/Discipline and click Edit. select Associated Level. and groups that are contained in a project. select Sub-Discipline. synchronize the two models for monitoring changes. From the Positioning list. Select Ascending Click OK twice. Select Imperial\Arch Link Model_i. select Family and Type. Notice that the file is saved as a template. under Template file. you link the architectural model with the MEP model. You can customize the organization of project views and sheets in the Project Browser to group them into folders. select Auto . Linking Projects In this exercise. and adjust the display settings of the Revit Architecture project. 34 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and click Browser Organization. sheets. select View Name.

The architectural model links to the MEP model and the current view remains active. 8 If necessary, reposition elevations in the plan view as shown.

Enable bounding elements for spaces 9 In the drawing area, select the linked architectural model. 10 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. 11 In the Type Properties dialog, under Constraints, select Room Bounding. 12 Click OK. 13 Press ESC to deselect the linked model. Add levels 14 Expand Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? and open North - Mech. 15 Zoom to the right side of the building to view the levels.

Linking Projects | 31

16 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level. 17 On the Options Bar, click Plan View types. 18 In the Plan View Types dialog, verify that Ceiling Plan and Floor Plan are selected and click OK. 19 On the left side of the view, click the level line for 03- Floor. 20 Move the cursor to the right side of the view and click to insert the level line for Mechanical 3. 21 Repeat the previous steps to create another level line for the roof. 22 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Adjust level lines You can adjust the level lines in the MEP design to match the level lines in the architectural model. 23 Select the level line for Level 2 and click the value.

24 Enter 12 and press ENTER. 25 Repeat the previous steps to adjust the level line for Level 2.

32 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects

Monitor the architectural levels You can monitor the elements within a Revit MEP model, and when the monitored elements are not synchronized, warnings notify you of any violations. These violations happen when the original monitored element from the linked project has changed, a copied monitored element in the host project has changed, or both original monitored and copied elements have changed. Warnings may also appear when the original element in the linked file is deleted or the copied element in the host file is deleted. Using the Copy/Monitor tool, you can copy elements within a current project or from a linked project to a host project. This establishes a relationship between the copied and original elements, which helps monitor changes to the original element and report differences. After copying, appears above the copied elements, indicating that a relationship is established, and that the copied elements are monitored. If you modify a monitored element, a warning message displays, indicating that an element has changed. 26 Click Collaborate tab ➤ Coordinate panel ➤ Copy/Monitor drop-down ➤ Select Link. 27 In the drawing area, highlight the linked model, and click to select the linked model. The Copy/Monitor tab is displayed. 28 Click Copy/Monitor tab ➤ Tools panel ➤ Monitor. 29 In the drawing area, click the MEP level line labeled Level 1, then click the architectural model level line labeled 01-Entry Level. appears and the monitor tool ensures that both level lines remain coordinated. 30 Repeat the previous steps to monitor the level lines for level 2, level 3, and the level 4. 31 On the Copy/Monitor tab, click Finish to exit the Copy/Monitor tool. Disable the display of architectural levels 32 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 33 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog, for the link file, click By Host View. 34 On the Basics tab, of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog, click Custom. 35 On the Annotation Categories tab:

For Annotation Categories, select Custom.

Linking Projects | 33

■ ■ ■

Select Show categories from all disciplines. Under Visibility, deselect Levels. Click OK.

36 Click OK.

Creating and Applying a View Template
In this exercise, you create a view template and apply it to your project template. Create a view template 1 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ View Templates drop-down ➤ Create template from current view. 2 In the New View Template dialog, for Name, enter Mechanical View and click OK. 3 In the View templates dialog, under View Properties, for V/G Overrides RVT Links, click Edit. 4 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility Graphics Override dialog, for the link file, click Custom. 5 On the Basics tab, of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog, click Custom. 6 On the Model Categories tab:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Model Categories, select Custom. Select Show categories from all disciplines. Under Visibility, deselect Parking, Planting, Roads, Site, and Topography. Click OK.

7 Click OK twice. Apply a view template 8 In the Project Browser, right-click Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? ➤ North - Mechanical and click Apply View Template.

34 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects

9 In the Apply View Template dialog, under View Templates, select Mechanical and click OK.

10 Close the file with or without saving your changes.

Modifying System Settings
In this exercise, you learn how to control the system settings for Revit MEP. System settings are local to each computer and applied to all projects; they are not saved to project files or template files.

Modifying General System Options
In this exercise, you modify the settings that control your local Revit MEP working environment. These settings control the graphics, selection default options, notification preferences, journal cleanup options, and your username when using worksharing. Set graphics settings 1 Click ➤ Options.

2 In the Options dialog, click the Graphics tab. 3 Under Colors, select Invert background color, and click OK. 4 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new project.

5 In the New Project dialog, under Template file, click Browse. 6 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\Templates\i_Tutorial_Default.rte. 7 Click OK. Notice that the drawing area is black. 8 Click ➤ Options.

9 In the Options dialog, click the Graphics tab.

Modifying System Settings | 35

10 Under Colors, click the value for Selection color. 11 In the Color dialog, select yellow, and click OK. NOTE You can also specify the Alert Color. When an error occurs, the elements causing the error display using this color. 12 Click the General tab. 13 Under Notifications, specify the following options:
■ ■

For Save reminder interval, select One hour. For Tooltip assistance, select None.

14 Click OK. 15 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. 16 Sketch a straight horizontal wall in the center of the drawing area. 17 Press ESC to end the command. 18 Select the wall.

Notice the selected wall is yellow rather than the default red. 19 Press ESC to end the command. 20 Place the cursor over the wall but do not select it. Notice that a tooltip is not displayed. However, the Status Bar displays information about the highlighted element. 21 Close the file without saving it.

Specifying File Locations
In this exercise, you specify default file locations. These settings control locations of important Revit MEP files, including your default project template, family template files, and family libraries. Set file locations 1 Click ➤ Options.

2 In the Options dialog, click the File Locations tab. 3 Under Default template file, click Browse.

36 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects

Notice that you can choose an industry-specific template as your default template.

TIP To view a template, you can start a new project with that template. Click and click Browse to select a template. 4 Click Cancel. 5 Under Default path for user files, click Browse.

➤ New ➤ Project,

6 In the Browse For Folder dialog, select the folder to save your files to by default, and click Open. 7 In the Options dialog, under Default path for family template files, click Browse. This path is set automatically during the installation process. These are the family templates that you use to create new families. It is unlikely that you would ever want to modify this path. However, there are some circumstances where you may need to modify the path, such as in a large, centralized, MEP firm where customized templates reside on a network drive. 8 Click Cancel. Specify library settings and create a new library 9 In the Options dialog, click Places. 10 In the Places dialog, note the list of library names. The list is dependent on the options that you selected during installation. Each library path points Revit MEP to a folder of families or training files. You can modify the existing library names and path, and you can create new libraries. An icon for each library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open, Save, Load, and Import dialogs.

When you are opening, saving, or loading a Revit MEP file, you can click on the library folder located in the left pane of the dialog. In the following illustration, notice that the libraries display as icons in the left pane of the dialog.

Specifying File Locations | 37

click (Add Value). 14 Navigate to C:\My Documents or a folder where you want to create a personal library of Revit MEP projects. TIP You may want to create a new folder first. and change the name to My Library. Save. The new library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open. The library icons display in the order in which they are listed in the Options dialog. and click OK twice. click the My Library icon. templates. Load. 38 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . 15 Under Library Name. and click (Browse). and select it as the library path. 18 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 12 Click in the Library Name field of the new library. or families. 16 Click 17 Click (Move Rows Up) until My Library is at the top of the list. 13 Click in the Library Path field for My Library. and Import dialogs. click My Library. ➤ Open.11 In the Places dialog. and click Open.

21 On the File Locations tab. enter sheetmtl-Cu. 4 Under Personal dictionary contains words added during spell check. This path specifies the location of the Render Appearance Library. 3 Under Settings. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. select Ignore words in uppercase. scroll down to view the list of building industry terms. 2 In the Options dialog. Notice that the spell checker allowed sheetmtl-Cu because you added it to the custom dictionary.Notice that Revit MEP navigates directly to the library path. and decal image files. such as bump maps. This path is determined during installation. you may want to set up an office library on a network path to increase productivity and maintain office standards. click OK. 8 Under Building industry dictionary. custom color files. 5 In the text editor. 13 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 23 Click 24 Click OK. If you work in a large office. Under Additional Render Appearance Paths. 26 Under Render Appearance Library Location. view the current path. 27 Click OK. (Remove Value) to delete the library. you modify the spelling settings and the custom dictionaries for Revit MEP. Modify spelling settings 1 Click ➤ Options. Specify rendering settings 25 Click the Rendering tab. 16 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Spelling. If you want to relocate this path. click Edit. click the Spelling tab. It allowed SHTMTL-CU because you set the spelling options to ignore words in uppercase. you can specify the locations of other files used to define render appearances. 20 Click ➤ Options. 7 Click File menu ➤ Exit. 19 Click Cancel. 11 In the Options dialog. 10 Click File menu ➤ Exit. 9 In the text editor. 22 Select My Library. specify the new location here. 14 Click in the drawing area. and enter This is sheetmtl-Cu and SHTMTL-CU. Specifying Spelling Options In this exercise. click Places. Specifying Spelling Options | 39 . 12 Create a new project using the default template. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Edit.

18 Click ➤ Options. This command resets the spelling settings to their original configuration. You can turn snap settings on and off.rte. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. click OK. work with snapping turned off. click File menu ➤ Save. 2 In the New Project dialog. Revit MEP uses the largest increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. click in the Length dimension snap increments box following the value 4’ . Modify snap increments 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit MEP project. and then click File menu ➤ Exit. 25 Close the file without saving it. 5 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. click Close. click Browse. under Dimension Snaps. You can add an increment by entering the value with a semicolon after it. 24 In the Options dialog. you modify snap settings. In this exercise. 6 In the Snaps dialog. As you zoom in and out within a view. and enter 1 . Modifying Snap Settings In this exercise. 19 In the Options dialog. you modify snap increments. 21 Under Personal dictionary.. click Edit. click OK. 40 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . 4 In the New Project dialog. or use the shortcut keys to force a particular snap method. 23 In the text editor. under Template file. click the Spelling tab. Notice that you can modify both length and angular snap increments. 20 Under Settings. delete sheetmtl-CU.17 In the Spelling dialog. and open Imperial\Templates\i_Tutorial_Default. Snap settings are system settings that are applied to all projects and not saved within a project file. click Training Files. click Restore Defaults. 22 In the text editor. and use shortcut keys to control snapping on an instance basis. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor.

12 While sketching a generic straight wall. If it does not. click OK. Notice that when snapping is turned off completely. enter SM. notice the 2-letter acronyms next to each object snap option. zoom out until it does so. You can use these shortcut keys at any time when working on the design. and move the cursor to the right. Modifying Snap Settings | 41 . the listening dimension reflects the exact length of the wall as you move the cursor to the left or right. If you do not have a wheel button. 10 On the Options Bar.7 Under Object Snaps. Notice that the listening dimension snaps at 4’ increments. you can also use the zoom shortcut keys. enter the shortcut key SO to turn snaps off. Sketch without snapping 13 While sketching the wall. such as ZO to zoom out. snapping reverts to the system default settings. While sketching. A listening dimension refers to the dimension that displays while you are sketching. 9 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. After you click to place the object at the midpoint. 11 Click in the center of the drawing area. deselect Chain. use the wheel button on your mouse. This dimension reacts to the movement of the cursor and numerical keyboard entries. you can right-click and select a zoom option from the shortcut menu. zoom in until the listening dimension snap increment shifts to 1’. and only midpoint snaps are recognized until you commit an action. if you want to snap an object to a wall midpoint. 8 In the Snaps dialog. For example. This is the increment that you added previously. TIP To zoom while sketching.

and move the cursor to the right. and specify the wall endpoint. Do not set the wall end point. click in the Length dimension snap increments box. If you move the cursor along the wall.. 18 Place the cursor over the horizontal wall you added previously. the command is only active for one click of the mouse. 23 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. 19 Enter SM. 25 Click OK. it will snap to the endpoints. This is the snap shortcut key that restricts all snapping to midpoints. 26 Close the file. 24 Under Dimension Snaps. Notice that snapping is once again active. Notice that the cursor snaps to various points on the wall. Make sure you also delete the semicolon. with or without saving it. 20 Notice that the cursor now snaps only to the midpoint of the wall. 15 Click in the drawing area to start a second wall. 22 Move the cursor downward. 21 Click to start the wall at the midpoint. and delete the value 1’ . Use snapping shortcut keys 16 Click Place Wall tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.14 Click to set the wall endpoint. 17 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. and the wall edges. When you use shortcut keys to control snapping. 42 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . the midpoint.

Creating a Mechanical System In this tutorial. You also learn how to design a mechanical air system and a mechanical piping system. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan mechanical systems. 43 .

44 .

However. This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis. After finishing each exercise. and specific techniques for designing mechanical systems.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. and then you create a plenum level.Planning Mechanical Systems 4 In this tutorial. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. Preparing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. you first configure the linked architectural model. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory. This workflow begins with system planning and concludes with system designing. After applying a color scheme to the zones. This system consists of a cooling tower. They contain information about the locations in which they are placed. If the tutorial training files are not present. you will understand the process. Then you assign zones to the spaces in order to control the spatial environment. you follow a series of lessons and exercises that teach the recommended system design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. duct system and a hydronic piping system. you first plan the system. you prepare a floor plan so that you can place spaces in later exercises. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to design a mechanical system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. water source heat pump (WSHP). methodology. go to http://www. 45 . you can choose to save your work. To create a mechanical system in Revit MEP. Because most MEP engineers work with a linked model during system design. In this exercise. As you create the mechanical system.autodesk. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. you begin planning the system by placing spaces in the building. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. In this lesson. At the end of the tutorial. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis to determine the heating and cooling requirements for the building. By following the recommended workflow. you learn best practices for system design while understanding how Revit MEP makes systems design more efficient. you design a mechanical system for an office building.

under Constraints. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_01_i. make certain that architectural elements (such as walls. 5 Press Esc to clear the selection. This makes the architectural components (such as walls. roof. and ceiling) are defined as room-bounding. and after the linked model highlights. indicating that it’s the active view. select Room Bounding. click to select it. 1 In the Project Browser.Space Plan is highlighted. NOTE When working with a linked file. ceilings. 2 Place the cursor over the linked model. In this section. 3 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. The status bar located at the bottom of the window and the tooltip indicate the Linked Revit Model. Next. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . and floors) recognized as boundaries for spaces. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you configure a linked model in order to begin designing systems in it. You must place spaces in all areas (occupied and unoccupied) of the building to create an accurate analytical model and achieve an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. and click OK. Add a Plenum level You create plenum levels so that you can place spaces in the unoccupied plenum areas (between the ceiling and the floor above) of the building. 46 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 4 In the Type Properties dialog. not in the MEP training file. These components are defined in the architectural training file. you add a level for plenums. The linked model is configured to place spaces using the linked building geometry to define the space volume. Configure the linked model for space bounding The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. click Training Files.rvt.

Click Plan View Types. and is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Floor Plans. offset by the Offset value (8' 0" ) above level 2. 12 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 9 On the Draw panel. For Offset. and select Level : Plenum from the Type Selector drop-down. click Yes (this will happen every time you create a new level). Because you have not yet specified the view classification or sub-discipline properties. The new level is placed. 7 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level.Design ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). and in the Plan View Types dialog. and enter Level 2 Plenum. 15 When asked to rename the corresponding level and views. and double-click West . click 10 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ (Line). expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ MEP . enter 8'. those categories in the Project Browser are listed as question marks. and a blue datum indicates that a plan view exists for the level. 16 Press Esc. Click the right endpoint of the Level 2 line. Preparing Spaces | 47 . This creates only a floor plan after the level is added. ■ 11 Draw a plenum level above Level 2 as follows: ■ ■ Click the left endpoint of the Level 2 line to specify the start point of the plenum level. 13 Zoom in on the right side of the elevation view.6 In the Project Browser. and click OK. Verify that Make Plan View is selected. A black datum indicates a reference level (the level is not taken into account during the creation of a view template). 14 Double-click the level name (Level 4). 8 Click Place Level tab ➤ Element panel. A new plenum floor plan view named Level 2 Plenum is created.MEP. verify that only Floor Plan is selected.

and click Properties. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. 48 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . verify that Associated Level (Level 2 Plenum) is specified with an offset of 0. for Default View Template.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans in the Project Browser. for View Scale. For Cut plane. verify that 1/8" = 1'-0" is selected. Notice that the site plan displays in the view. The Level 2 Plenum floor plan is now listed under MEP . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Floor Plans. and click Apply Default View Template. 18 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. For Sub-Discipline. you can choose to save your work.Modify plenum properties 17 In the Project Browser. Apply a view template 19 Open the Level 2 Plenum view. click Edit. select Design. 21 Close the file with or without saving it.Plenum. However. and for Offset. select MEP . In this exercise. right-click Level 2 Plenum. 20 In the Project Browser. select Level Above (Level 3). right-click Level 2 Plenum. In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. you use space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area. enter an Offset of 1' 0". for Level. In the next exercise. you created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view in preparation of placing spaces. They contain information about the locations in which they are placed. You apply the default view template so that only the architectural floor plan displays. In this exercise. Under Extents. and then place spaces in various types of areas. select Plenum Plan. you place spaces in areas of the building model. enter 0. NOTE After finishing each exercise. The view graphics are modified based on the template applied. it is highly recommended that you always begin each exercise by opening the training file that Autodesk provides. for Top. This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis. for View Range. Under Identity Data. Placing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. ■ Click OK twice. For View Classification. Under View Depth.

For Upper Limit. indicating that it’s the active view. You can also use the Highlight Boundaries feature to view boundary elements in the model. Spaces can be created automatically and numbered in sequence by using the Create Automatically tool. 5 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected. For (Tag Location). walls. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_02_i.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. click Training Files. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . For Space. Place a space 1 In the Project Browser. For Offset. and select Space Tag With Volume from the Type Selector drop-down.rvt. 6 Place the cursor in the room until the space snaps to the room-bounding elements (floor. ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is cleared.Space Plan is highlighted. enter 0. 2 Zoom to the empty room to the left of the corridor. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel. Placing Spaces | 49 . select New. This specifies the vertical extent of the space. select Level 2 Plenum. and ceilings). select Horizontal.

10 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Identity Data. Notice that the space number and name now match the room number and name from the linked architectural file. 14 In the drawing area. double-click the section head in the Library to open the section view (Section 26). 50 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum. enter 219. 8 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. Click OK.7 Click to place the space. 13 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden. Prepare the plenum view 12 Open Design ➤ MEP . for Number. ■ 11 Press Esc to clear the selection. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. For Name. 9 Select the space. ensuring coordination between the files. The software automatically zooms the new view to the same location as in the open view. enter Library.

and then click Modify. 18 Select Space Tag With Volume from the Type Selector drop-down. Place a space in the plenum 16 Click in the Level 2 Plenum floor plan to activate it. 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. For Offset. 19 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected. enter 0. 21 Using the method learned previously.15 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. select Level 3. For Upper Limit. change the space name to Plenum and the number to 219P. Notice that the space is created in the section view at the same time. Placing Spaces | 51 . 20 Click in the Library to place the space. demonstrating the parametric functionality of the software.

22 In the Instance Properties dialog. under Energy Analysis. Placing a Space in an Open Area In this exercise. 52 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 24 Notice that the floor plan has updated with the changes. This is beneficial to split up large volumes for equipment selection and sizing. 23 Click OK. and then split the space using a space separation line. you place a space in a large corridor area. select Plenum and verify that Occupiable is cleared. 25 Close the file with or without saving it.

click Training Files.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Place a space in an open area 1 In the Project Browser. and select Space Tag With Volume from the Type Selector drop-down. In the left pane of the Open dialog. verify that Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . select Level 3. 2 Zoom in to the central corridor near the stairs. 6 Click above the top stair to place the corridor space. and for Offset. for Upper Limit. 5 On the Options Bar. enter 0. indicating that it’s the active view. Placing a Space in an Open Area | 53 .rvt. and then press Esc. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_03_i. 4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel.Space Plan is highlighted. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space.

9 In the floor plan. and double-click the title of the plan view to maximize the view. 10 Using the same method. open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Schedule. as shown. 12 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space Separator. change the space number to 216A. 11 Close the schedule view. 13 To specify the start point of the separation line.7 In the Project Browser. 14 Click perpendicular to the opposite curtain wall to end the horizontal separation line. double-click the space name. and press Enter. 54 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . the plan view would have updated with the changes. enter Corridor. and notice that the schedule updates with the changes. which was numbered 219Q. and scroll to the newly placed space. 8 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. In the schedule. click the endpoint of the lower wall in space Instruction 221. If you had modified the name and number in the schedule view instead. notice the corresponding architectural room name and number.

18 Close the file with or without saving it. The new space is numbered correctly (216B). place a space in the lower area of the split space. Notice the changed boundaries of the corridor space. Placing a Space in an Open Area | 55 . with an upper limit of Level 3 and an offset of 0. 16 Using the method learned previously.15 Press Esc twice. 17 Change the name of the space to Corridor.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. indicating that it’s the active view. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_04_i. and place a section in the view as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click in the Cafeteria space to specify the section start point. click Training Files. Shading is a visual indication of where spaces have been placed (shaded) and where they need to be placed (empty).Placing a Multi-Level Space In this exercise. 2 Zoom to the chase between the male (226) and female (225) restrooms in the north wing. click (Flip Section) to reorient the section. If necessary. Click in the Male restroom to specify the section endpoint. Add a multi-level space 1 In the Project Browser. Use the lower drag control to change the section boundary as shown.Space Plan is highlighted. and change the upper limit to account for the entire volume of the chase. you place a space in a chase. 56 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .rvt. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section.

and then click OK. but that the space does not fill the entire chase. ■ ■ 14 Click OK. On the Options Bar. 9 Zoom each view as necessary in order to view the chase. select Level 3. 8 Enter WT to tile the views. select the space. select Interior and Reference. For Number. click in the chase area to place the space. enter 0. and click Element Properties. In the plan view. Placing a Multi-Level Space | 57 . 6 Enter VG. You enter a value that is above the level of the roof. for Upper Limit. select Roof Level. expand Spaces. 11 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 10 In the plan view. For Limit Offset. 12 Click in the section view. for Upper Limit. 13 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Constraints. Notice that you can see the space in the section view as well as in the plan view. For Offset. 7 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. enter Chase. enter 225PC. 5 Double-click the section head to open the section view. enter 4'. for Name. right-click.4 Press Esc. Under Identity Data. add a space: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space.

All spaces in the view are tagged. You have created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view. 58 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . you work with zones in order to control the spatial environment and perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. 17 Type ZF. and roofs) define the extent of space volume used in calculations. 19 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. select Space Tag With Volume. and click OK. ceilings. floors. You used space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area that was part of a larger area. and you placed spaces for various types of areas. Because the chase space is limited by a bounding element. and maximize the view. the space displays the volume up to the roof only. 15 Press Esc. Tag spaces 16 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . under Loaded Tags. 20 Close the file with or without saving it. In the next exercises.Space Plan.Bounding elements (such as walls. 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All.

In this exercise. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. Zones allow you to control the spatial environment and to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. ) or Viewing Zones in the System Browser | 59 . The different graphics in the System Browser indicate whether a space is occupiable ( unoccupiable ( ). The recommended workflow is to add each space to a zone that you create. it is automatically added to the Default zone. click View ➤ Zones. 1 In the Project Browser. Notice that Default is currently the only zone.Zoning is highlighted. The System Browser opens and docks to the right of the drawing area. click Reference. After a space is placed in an area. which removes the space from the Default zone. 3 Right-click in the System Browser. under Spaces.rvt. Revit MEP immediately adds them to the Default zone. click Training Files. The browser is a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones to which they have been assigned. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. indicating that it’s the active view. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. NOTE A space cannot be placed into an area without being added to a zone. 4 Double-click Default to display a list of the spaces in the building model. you view and verify zones in the System Browser. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. To display space reference lines. You can change the Occupiable parameter for each space. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_01_i. and verify that All Disciplines is selected. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.Viewing Zones in the System Browser After spaces are placed in the building. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser.

Zoning is highlighted. and click OK.rvt. select Occupiable. you assign spaces to a zone. and Electrical 220 spaces. under Energy Analysis. double-click 121 Cafeteria. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. You work with a single zone until you click Finish. The Zone tool is active. Instruction 221. Creating Zones on a Single Level In this exercise. the Edit Zone tab displays. 6 In the Instance Properties dialog. As you do this.5 In the System Browser. Next. The new zone is listed in the System Browser. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone. 4 In the drawing area. indicating that it’s the active view. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. under Spaces. 7 Close the file with or without saving it. you assign spaces to zones in the building. click Training Files. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . select Computer Lab 222. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_02_i. you will use the System Browser to confirm that the spaces are in the new zone. The graphic in the System Browser updates. 60 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 3 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. and modify the zone properties. indicating that the space is occupiable. To display space reference lines. you can add or remove a space from the zone. Using the Edit Zone tab. and click Finish Editing Zone. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and verify the zones in the System Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. click Reference. NOTE The Edit Zone tab provides zone tools and information. and a new zone is created. Assign spaces to a zone 1 In the Project Browser.

In the System Browser. you need to activate the zone visibility. Creating Zones on a Single Level | 61 . Click OK. ■ The new zone displays with color fill and a zone reference line. 5 With the drawing area active. expand the new zone and notice that the Computer Lab. type VG. 6 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog: ■ ■ Under Visibility. Instruction. and Electrical spaces are added to it (and removed from the Default zone). To view the zone in the drawing area. select HVAC Zones. and then select only Interior Fill and Reference Lines (clear Boundary and Color Fill). Expand HVAC Zones. The zone reference line indicates that the 3 spaces are in the zone.

click Reference. expand 2 . verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . and verify the zone in the System Browser.rvt.Area B to confirm that the 3 spaces are in it. 62 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . click Finish Editing Zone. 12 Close the file with or without saving it. for Name. 3 Open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . You activated zone visibility in the views. you can drag the zone reference line to relocate it and better view the spaces that are in the zone. The new zone name displays in the System Browser. Creating Zones on Multiple Levels In this exercise. and verified the zones in both the floor plan views and in the System Browser. In this exercise. 2 Zoom in to Lounge 215 (to the right of the central stairs). 4 Enter WT to tile the 2 windows. 10 On the Edit Zone tab. you assign spaces on multiple levels to a zone in the building. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. and then click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Zone Properties. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. 11 Close the System Browser. Create a zone for spaces on multiple levels 1 In the Project Browser. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_03_i. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. To display space reference lines. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.Zoning. Rename the zone 7 Select the zone. under Spaces.West .West . Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. you assigned zones to spaces that were on the same level of the building. enter 2 . and click OK.Zoning is highlighted.Area B. 9 In the System Browser. under Identity Data. indicating that it’s the active view. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog.TIP After you finish editing the zone.

6 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone. 7 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. Verify that the distance is 1/2". Select Attached End. 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. Tag a zone 11 Activate the Level 1 .Zoning floor plan. select Lounge 120 to add it to the zone. zoom out. Creating Zones on Multiple Levels | 63 .Zoning view to activate it. 14 Click in the Lounge space to tag the associated zone. 9 With the Add Space tool active.5 Click in the Level 1 . 13 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is selected. 15 Press Esc. and add the Lounge 215 space to the zone.Zoning view. click in the Level 2 . 10 Click Finish Editing Zone. and then select the tag so that you can use the drag control to move it as desired.Zoning view. 8 In the Level 1 .

double-click the zone tag. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 19 Close the file with or without saving it. for Name Value. Front.East.The tag only displays in the view where it was placed. enter Lounge . The new zone name displays in the System Browser. and zone information. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads. click the corner where the Top.Zoning view. Verify building information 1 In the Project Browser. In this exercise. and click OK. you created a zone for spaces on different levels of the building. View a space 3 In the preview pane of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. on the ViewCube. Because the heating and cooling loads calculations have not been performed.rvt. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_01_i. 64 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . You can expand the zone in the System Browser to view the spaces in it. the tag displays “Not Computed” for those values. you verify the building. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and view graphical representations of the spaces to verify space boundaries and volumes. and Left corners converge to orient the model as shown. Rename the zone 16 In the Level 1 . 17 In the Change Parameter Values dialog.Zoning to make it the active view. click Training Files. 18 Press F9 to display the System Browser. space. double-click Level 1 . under Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans. Working with the Analytical Model In this exercise.

NOTE Wireframe displays the volume of a space measured by the interior boundaries. ■ TIP You can use the ViewCube to spin/reorient the view. Using the Highlight tool. The space displays while all other spaces are hidden. The space for 109 Lounge highlights in red. verify that Wireframe is selected. The Isolate tool allows you to verify one or more spaces even if they are usually obstructed by other spaces or by the building architecture. ■ Click to deactivate the Highlight tool. Next. Right-click in the preview pane to access pan and zoom commands. With 109 Lounge selected. you isolate the space. ■ Working with the Analytical Model | 65 . The Details tab contains a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones that have been assigned to them. You can also view a space in relation to the other spaces or architecture in the entire building. and select 109 Lounge.4 On the View Selector (located below the preview pane). click (Isolate). you can verify that the space boundaries are as you defined them. Click (Highlight). 5 On the Details tab: ■ Expand 1_South_Lounge.

click . Revit MEP provides default settings for space types. click . and click OK. the space information displays for the selected space. You can use the Space Type Settings dialog to adjust settings as necessary. For People. Verify space information 7 On the Details tab. select 1_South_Lounge. you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the space. and in the People dialog. 6 Click to deactivate the Isolate tool. ■ ■ ■ Next. 8 Verify the space information: ■ For Space Type. 66 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . verify that <Default> is selected for Occupancy and Heat Gain (per person). you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the zone. Next. For Electrical Loads. and in the Space Type Settings dialog. This specifies the lighting and power loads for the space. and then click OK. click . and then click OK. select Lounge/Recreation. Below the list of spaces and zones. This specifies the number of people or the area per person for the space. scroll down in the left pane. verify that <Default> is selected for Lighting Values and for Power Values. These specify the space usage and construction materials for the space. All spaces in the zone display in isolation. verify that <Building> is selected. For Construction Type.■ On the Details tab. select 109 Lounge. and in the Electrical Loads dialog.

and dehumidification set point. verify that 70. 10 Verify the zone information: ■ ■ For Service Type. verify that 74.Verify zone information 9 Select 1_South_Lounge. floors. This is usually preferable to indicating a particular percentage for those parameters.00 °F : N/A is specified. The inner volume is bounded by interior surfaces of walls. This indicates the outdoor air per person. you use the Shading view to examine the inner volume of the model for voids. NOTE Shading displays the inner volume of a space. verify that N/A : N/A : N/A is specified. and zoom to the corner of the building as shown. NOTE By not specifying values for the humidification set point and dehumidification set point. View the shaded model 11 On the View Selector. the zone information displays for the selected zone.00 °F : N/A is specified. highlight and isolate the space for 109 Lounge to view its inner volume. Working with the Analytical Model | 67 . This indicates the heating set point.00 °F : 90. Below the list of spaces and zones. For Heating Information. ■ ■ For Outdoor Air Information. Next.00 °F : 54. you allow the values to be calculated by the loads engine. and air changes per hour. 12 Using the methods learned previously. cooling air temperature. and humidification set point. For Cooling Information. heating air temperature. verify that <Building> is selected. outdoor air per area. and other room-bounding components. 13 Deactivate the Isolate tool. This indicates the cooling set point. roofs. click (Shading).

select Level 3. and then click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.Notice that there is a void in a second-floor plenum space. it doesn’t need to be included in the heating and cooling loads analysis. click Cancel. for Number. enter 0. Under Energy Analysis. Because this is an unoccupied space. Add a space to fill a void 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. 15 In the Project Browser. select the zone that includes all plenum spaces for Level 2 (named 2_Plenum). 16 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. select Plenum. select Plenum. 18 Click in the empty plenum area to place the space. ■ ■ Add the plenum space to a zone 21 In the drawing area. For Offset. Notice that Condition Type updates to Unconditioned. 20 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. open MEP . 68 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . Click OK. 17 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Upper Limit.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum. notice that Condition Type is Heated and Cooled. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Modify space properties 19 Select the space. Under Energy Analysis. enter 212P. For Name.

and you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis. 25 Open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. On the Place tab. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. select School or University. Select Automatically adjust the clock for daylight savings changes. verify that Manchester.rvt. double-click Level 2 . 23 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. In this exercise. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_02_i. you specify project settings that affect heating and cooling. Specify project settings 1 In the Project Browser. NH. and verify that the space has replaced the void. The report that is the result of this analysis allows you to determine the heating and cooling demands of the building. 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads In this exercise. and select space Plenum 212P. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans.22 Click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Zone panel ➤ Edit Zone. is selected. under Energy Analysis. 4 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. For Location. For Postal Code. click Training Files. space. click Edit. and then click In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ ■ . you verified building. In the left pane of the Open dialog. for Energy Data. and zone information. 3 In the Instance Properties dialog.Space Plan. and viewed the spaces in the preview pane to verify space boundaries and volumes. for City. click in the Value field. enter 03101. 24 Click Finish Editing Zone. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 69 .

For Condition Type. For Sliver Space Tolerance. enter 150 Btu/h.When the location is in an area that observes Daylight Savings Time. you need to select this option. right-click. In the People dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Occupancy. verify that Use closest weather station (Manchester Airport) is selected. 8 In the drawing area. In order to select a space. ■ In the Type Properties dialog.Audio Visual. or neither. For Latent. for Values. Select Area per person. select Specified. select Library . For Sensible. and then click . ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Space Type Settings dialog. For Project Phase. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Energy Analysis. For Export Complexity. verify that <Building> is specified. verify that Areas and Volumes is selected (default setting). and click OK. a cooling load. ■ On the Weather tab. 7 Zoom in to the center area of the building. verify that Occupiable is selected. first highlight it using the cursor so that the space crossing lines display. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify area and volume setting 5 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Area and Volume Computations. for Values. click in the Value column. verify that New Construction is selected. verify that Simple with Shading Surfaces is selected. you receive a message that the Areas and Volumes option is not checked and that the space volumes will be approximate. enter 200 Btu/h. For Space Type. this option adjusts the times automatically. and click OK. If. and click OK. select Specified. click Edit. 6 On the Computations tab of the Area and Volume Computations dialog. and enter 50 sq. 70 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . both. after opening the Heating and Cooling Loads tool. Click OK twice. For People. and click Element Properties. verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is specified. for Building Service. select space Library 219. ft. For Ground Plane. Under Heat Gain (per Person). under Volume Computations. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. This is the parameter that determines whether a space is included in a heating load. For Building Construction. NOTE The Areas and Volumes option must be selected in order to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. verify that 1' 0" is specified. verify that Level 1 is selected. select Heated and cooled.

select Actual. for Values. and can be modified here. 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads. Click OK twice. Select the space associated with the warning.■ ■ ■ Click OK. (opens the IMPORTANT The Heating and Cooling Loads dialog contains building information that only affects the heating and cooling loads analysis. and under Heating Information. verify the settings specified earlier: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. For Building Service. and click to learn the cause for the warning. click Edit. ■ Select 2_Middle_Library. verify that Heating Set Point is 70°F . click Calculate. You have verified the building information. you view the space and zone volumes in the building model. verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is selected. click Information). and click OK. (Zone Heating ■ In the Heating Information dialog. select Actual. verify that Manchester. 13 Under 2_Middle_Library. Perform a heating and cooling loads analysis 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. Various factors (such as analytical and inner volumes of the spaces) are analyzed as Revit MEP performs the heating and cooling loads analysis. If you have made changes to settings in the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. and then re-open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog to begin calculations. NH. You can view the building materials for this construction type by clicking Building Construction dialog). Next. For Electrical Loads. verify that School or University is selected. select 219 Library. click OK to save your changes and close the dialog. In the Electrical Loads dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Lighting. Under Power. You should correct the space error in the building model. 12 Click the Details tab. There should be no warnings displayed. it should be corrected before you calculate loads. verify that <Building> is specified. For Location. If a (Warning) displays for any space in the building. for Values. For Building Construction. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 71 . Revit MEP stores this information as project information. The information for the space that you entered in the Element Properties dialog displays. 11 On the General tab of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. is specified. See Help for more information about the integrated heating and cooling loads analysis tool and its calculation methods.

17 In the loads report. you assign a color scheme to a zone in the building. 2 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend. You are taken to the place in the report where the space information is displayed for review. Creating a Zone Color Scheme In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. For Color Scheme. space.Space Plan. click Training Files. the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog closes. 18 Close the report and activate Level 2 . verify that Cooling Load by Zone is selected. 19 In the drawing area. under Energy Analysis. Click OK. 72 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . indicating that it’s the active view. click the blue hyperlink for 219 Library. TIP You can find all generated Loads Reports in the Project Browser under Reports. 16 After you review the loads report.rvt. Notice that the space information was automatically updated. In this exercise. select HVAC Zones. 3 In the drawing area. NOTE You must perform a new heating and cooling loads analysis each time you modify building. click to the right of the building to place the legend. select 219 Library. 20 In the Instance Properties dialog. and zone information for the building model. A color scheme allows you to communicate and identify parameters visually and spatially rather than by using space schedules or accessing element properties. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_03_i.After the heating and cooling loads analysis is completed.Zoning Load Fill is highlighted. 4 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Space Type. you performed a heating and cooling loads analysis on your building and viewed the loads report. 15 Review the loads report for project. under the zone summary for 2_Middle_Library. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. otherwise the loads report or schedules will not reflect your changes. 22 Close the file with or without saving it. or zone information. and a loads report displays. review the Calculated Loads and Design Loads. 21 Click OK. and then click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. or make any changes to the model. space. Assign a color scheme to a zone 1 In the Project Browser. weather. you can rezone the model as necessary to optimize equipment usage in the building.

under Schemes. select the color scheme legend. Notice that the cooling load is based on tonnage value. in 1-ton increments. Creating a Zone Color Scheme | 73 . select Tonnage Range. 8 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. 7 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. and click OK. Select a different color scheme legend 6 In the drawing area. The new scheme displays in the view. You want a scheme that allows for a greater tonnage range.5 Zoom in to the legend.

add a Cooling Load by Zone color scheme to the HVAC zones of the section view. 11 Using the method learned previously. 74 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .The new scheme allows for a greater range of cooling load values. open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26. 9 Type ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area. The colors are updated in the plan view to match the new scheme type. Apply a color scheme to a section view 10 In the Project Browser.

and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_04_i. for Select available fields from. you applied a color scheme to the zones in your building. 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Report and Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. For Name. select Spaces. Creating an Airflow Schedule In this exercise.12 Close the file with or without saving it. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Define the schedule 1 In the Project Browser. you create a schedule for the supply air system project. You then use the schedule to adjust the air terminal airflow properties to more closely meet design requirements. select Spaces. In the next exercise.rvt. ■ ■ ■ ■ Specify schedule properties 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ At the bottom left of the dialog. Select Schedule building components. If you select Show categories from all disciplines. you create a schedule that you use as a design tool for the supply air system. In this exercise. you use it as a design tool to determine whether the correct amount of airflow is being supplied to each of the rooms in the model. Instead of placing this schedule on sheets as a construction document.Space Fill is the active view. more category options are available. Creating an Airflow Schedule | 75 . Click OK. select New Construction. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. verify that Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . For Phase. click Training Files. enter Space Airflow Schedule.

(minus sign) after Calculated Supply Airflow. select Calculated Supply Airflow. add Actual Supply Airflow to the formula. select HVAC. and then click Conditional Format. Define conditional formatting for the airflow delta ■ In the Conditional Formatting dialog: ■ For Test. select Airflow Delta. In the Calculated Value dialog. You format the Airflow Delta field to display as red when the difference between calculated and actual airflow is outside an acceptable range. select Level. double-click: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Level Number Name Calculated Supply Airflow Actual Supply Airflow The selected fields are added to the Scheduled fields section.■ Under Available fields. Select Ascending. Click OK. and click OK. enter . In the Schedule Properties dialog. for Formula. the calculated value named Airflow Delta displays under Scheduled fields and will display as a column in the schedule. For Type. ■ Click Calculated Value. and Blank line. select Not Between. For Formula. ■ ■ Using the method learned previously. click (Browse). Define the airflow delta formula 5 In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. For Then by. enter Airflow Delta. and then select Hidden field. Select Formula. and then click . For Fields. In the Fields dialog. 76 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . select Level. select Air Flow. select Number. Header. Specify additional schedule properties ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab: ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. ■ On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ For Fields. For Discipline.

In the next lesson. you use the airflow schedule when adding system components to satisfy the required airflow. select red. In the Color dialog. For Background Color. 6 On the Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Filter Unplaced or Unenclosed Items panel. right-click to access schedule properties. and click OK. In later exercises. Click OK twice. enter -25 CFM and 25 CFM. Creating an Airflow Schedule | 77 .■ ■ ■ For Value. you created an airflow schedule and defined properties such that when the airflow delta is in an unacceptable range. Under Conditions to Use. ■ The schedule displays. In this exercise. notice that the software will test for delta values that are outside the range of -25 to 25 CFM. click the color swatch. 7 Close the file with or without saving it. a view opens that contains the selected space. and all Airflow Delta fields are red for occupiable spaces. all the Actual Supply Airflow values are 0. or right-click a column to hide or unhide it. This concludes the planning stage of the systems project. you begin the designing phase by placing air terminals in the spaces. and you can manipulate the display of columns as with any spreadsheet. the schedule gives a visual indication of the discrepancy. verify that Show is highlighted. Because no air terminals have been placed in the model. Double-click the column boundary to expand the column to the width of the text. When you select a field and click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Highlight in Model.

78 .

you will create supply air systems. You begin your supply air systems design by placing air terminals in rooms and adding a water source heat pump (WSHP). Then. IMPORTANT It is highly recommended that you complete Designing Mechanical Air Systems before starting Designing Piping Systems. you modify air terminal parameters. you place air terminals in the ceiling of the rooms. you use automatic layout tools and manual placement to create the primary and secondary supply air systems and ductwork to connect the components that you added. After system creation. In this lesson. learn a method to precisely place air terminals into the ceiling plan. Placing Hosted Air Terminals In this exercise. After completing the air systems lesson. As you place the air terminals. you size ductwork and validate your air system design. and work with the airflow schedule.Designing Mechanical Air Systems 5 Designing air systems in Revit MEP is a straightforward and intuitive process. you will have been introduced to concepts and practices that you will use to design the piping systems. 79 .

HVAC Ceiling is highlighted. indicating that it’s the active view. and notice that the space is selected in the plan view as well. zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. 2 Double-click Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 3 In the ceiling view. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_01_i.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans ➤ Level 2 . the space crossing lines display. click Training Files. Prepare the design views 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. 80 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . When you highlight a space using the cursor.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 4 Click in the schedule view to make it active. and then click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and scroll to space 223. 5 Select space 223 in the schedule.

click Place on Face. 18 Repeat to add a third diffuser. Modify the supply diffuser flow 12 In the ceiling plan. Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 81 . Also. If the host element is modified or moved. verify that Constrain is cleared. as shown. enter 425 CFM. for Flow.Hosted from the Type Selector drop-down. The schedule updates with the new flow data. select the diffuser.Rectangular Face Round Neck . and then press Esc to end the command.Add a supply air terminal 6 Click in Level 2 .Hosted : 24"x24" Face 8" Neck . 11 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. 15 On the Options Bar. 10 Click to place the supply diffuser in the upper left corner of the space. the hosted elements are updated as well. and press Enter. 13 On the Options Bar. Copy the supply diffuser 14 With the diffuser still selected.HVAC Ceiling to make it the active view. NOTE Hosted air terminals are placed at the height of the host. Multiple allows you to place multiple copies of the diffuser without reactivating the Copy tool after each placement. and press Enter. which in this case is the ceiling grid. click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. Notice that the lounge’s Actual Supply Airflow field in the schedule updates after the terminal is placed. 17 Move the cursor down. type 12. the Airflow Delta is calculated accordingly. and select Supply Diffuser . 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. 16 Select the upper left corner of the diffuser as the copy start point. 19 Place 2 additional diffusers as shown. 8 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Element panel. 9 On the Placement panel. and then select both Copy and Multiple.

rfa. Next. you edit the return diffuser family in order to align the diffuser edges to the ceiling grid lines. click Place on Face. select one of the diffusers. 82 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . Place return diffusers 26 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. and then press Esc. 22 In the drawing area. clear Leader. 28 On the Placement tab. If alerted that there is no tag loaded for the diffuser object. 24 In the Open dialog. you load one from the library as follows: 23 In the alert dialog. 25 In the drawing area. As you place the return diffusers. click Yes. 27 Select Return Diffuser . Each diffuser has an airflow capacity of 425 CFM. select each of the 5 supply diffusers. as shown. and the airflow delta value is within acceptable range.Tag diffusers 20 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 21 On the Options Bar. 29 Place 2 diffusers. notice that the insertion point snaps the center of each diffuser to a grid intersection instead of centering the diffuser between grid lines.Hosted : Workplane-based Return Diffuser from the Type Selector drop-down. navigate to Training\Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\Diffuser Tag. and click Open.

press Tab to highlight the chain of lines. 33 Highlight one of the symbolic lines.Edit the diffuser family 30 In the drawing area. 36 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project. 35 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family. select one of the return diffusers. open Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Ref. You change the symbolic lines to strong references so that they can be used to align to the lines of the ceiling grid. 32 In the Project Browser. as shown. Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 83 . for Reference. under Other. click Yes. 34 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Instance Properties. select Strong Reference. and click OK. and click to select the lines. Level. 31 In the alert dialog.

37 In the Family Already Exists dialog, click Overwrite the existing version and its parameter values. Align the diffusers in the ceiling grid 38 In the ceiling plan, zoom in to the return diffuser at the bottom left of the Lounge. 39 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align. 40 In the drawing area, select the vertical grid line as shown.

41 Select the right edge of the diffuser. 42 Select the horizontal grid line as shown, and then select the top edge of the diffuser.

43 Using the same method, align the other return diffuser, as shown, and then press Esc twice.

44 While pressing Ctrl, select both return diffusers, and on the Options Bar, for Flow, enter 650 CFM310 CFM, and press Enter. Modify the airflow display arrows 45 Select the return diffuser at the lower left, right-click, and click Element Properties. 46 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Mechanical, clear LeftArrow, and click OK.

84 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

47 Using the same method, clear RightArrow and DownArrow for the other return diffuser.

48 Close the file with or without saving it.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals
In this exercise, you place air terminals in a room that does not have a dropped ceiling. As you place the air terminals, you modify air terminal parameters and work with the airflow schedule.

Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open ➤ Project.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_02_i.rvt.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 85

Add non-hosted air terminals 1 In the Project Browser, expand HVAC - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1 - HVAC Plan - Design to make it the active view. 2 On the View Control Bar, for Scale, click 1/8" = 1'-0". 3 Zoom in to space Instruction 115, at the lower left corner of the building. When you highlight a space using the cursor, the space crossing lines display, and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden. 5 Open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule, and then click View tab ➤ Windows ➤ Tile. 6 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. 8 In the Type Selector, select Supply Diffuser - Rectangular Face Round Neck : 24x24 - 8 Neck. 9 On the Options Bar, verify that Tag on Placement is selected. 10 In the drawing area, click to place the air terminal in the space as shown, and then click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.

The schedule was automatically updated with the actual supply airflow capacity of the diffuser. Also, the diffuser was tagged as it was placed. NOTE The software assigns sequential numbers to components in the order in which they are placed in a drawing. If you delete a component and subsequently place more of the same component in the same drawing, the number assigned to the deleted component will not be used. As a result, your components may be numbered differently than those in the training files. 11 Select the diffuser, and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 12 Modify the diffuser properties:

In the Instance Properties dialog, under Constraints, for Offset, enter 8'. Because non-hosted components are associated with a level, the offset value is the height of the diffuser from the level. Under Mechanical - Airflow, for Flow, enter 360 CFM. Click OK.

■ ■

86 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

13 With the diffuser still selected, click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 14 Select the bottom left corner of the diffuser, move the cursor down, type 20', and then press Enter. 15 Press Esc. By copying the diffuser, you are also specifying the same offset and flow for the new diffuser. Notice that the copied air terminal does not have a tag.

16 Using the same method, select both air terminals and copy them 14' to the right.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 87

Tag existing diffusers 17 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 18 On the Options Bar, clear Leader. 19 Select each of the untagged diffusers, and then press Esc. Create an embedded schedule You enhance the schedule by creating an embedded schedule to show data (system type, type, mark, and flow) for individual diffusers in each space. 20 Double-click the title bar of the Space Airflow Schedule to maximize it, and then right-click in the schedule, and click View Properties. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Other, for Embedded Schedule, click Edit. 22 In the Schedule Properties dialog:
■ ■

Select Embedded Schedule. For Category, select Air Terminals, and then click Embedded Schedule Properties.

23 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available Fields, double-click System Type, Type, Mark, and Flow. 24 On the Sorting/Grouping tab, for Sort by, select Mark. 25 Click OK 3 times. The schedule is updated and lists the data for individual air terminals in each space. Although the Airflow Delta value is within an acceptable range, it is a negative value. Next, you modify the airflow capacity of the diffuser in the lower left corner of the space to offset the increased heat gain of the southwesterly exposure.

88 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

Modify an airflow value in the schedule You use the schedule as a design tool to modify the airflow. 26 Using the method learned previously, tile the windows. 27 In the schedule, under space 115, select SD 1-12-110. 28 In the embedded portion of the Space Airflow Schedule, for Flow, enter 450 CFM, and press Enter. 29 Using the same method, change the flow for SD 1-12-111 and 112 to 330 CFM. Each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project, because you are modifying the digital database of building information. This digital database information source is the integral concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM).

The Airflow Delta value for the space updates to a positive number.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 89

Place air handling equipment 30 Close the Space Airflow Schedule, and maximize Level 1 - HVAC Plan - Design. 31 In the drawing area, select the zone (2-West-Area T) that includes space 115. As you highlight the zone, pay attention to the tooltip and the status bar to be sure you’re selecting the zone and not the space. The zone indicator has a line that spans all spaces in the zone, as shown.

32 Open the Instance Properties dialog, and under Energy Analysis, verify that the Calculated Heating Load value is 33807 Btu/h and the Calculated Cooling Load value is 3.9 ton (approximately 1.5 times the heating load). 33 Click OK. 34 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 35 In the Type Selector, select WSHP - Horizontal - High Efficiency - 2-5 Tons - Left Return - Right Discharge : 4 Tons. 36 In the drawing area, zoom and pan to the double door for space 115. 37 Press Spacebar twice to change the rotation of the pump so that the supply faces the space and the return faces away from the space. 38 Click to select an insertion point so that the supply is at the approximate center of the doorway. 39 Press Esc twice to end the command.

90 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

For the start point. click the Level 1 line. enter 9' 0"2750. for Constraints ➤ Offset. 44 Zoom in to space 115. and verify the height of the WSHP: ■ ■ Click Modify tab ➤ Inquiry panel ➤ Measure drop-down ➤ Measure Between Two References. Verify that the measured distance is 9'. ■ ■ For the end point. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 91 . click to select the midpoint of the bottom of the WSHP.40 Access the instance properties for the heat pump. 42 Press Esc to clear the selection. Verify equipment mounting heights 43 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26. 41 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click OK.

and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. 45 Close the file with or without saving it. In the left pane of the Open dialog. they are necessary to perform calculations (such as sizing) that reference the physical geometry. 5 Verify that there are no Mechanical systems listed. the space crossing lines display. In this exercise. You then create the logical connection between the system components. right-click the title. you then create ductwork to physically connect the system components. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. you also use the System Browser to validate systems. However. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser.Press Esc. Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser. 4 If the System Browser title is Zones.rvt. 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 at the upper left of the building. IMPORTANT Unlike logical connections. This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation.HVAC Plan . physical connections (ductwork) are not required for systems designing. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses. including energy analysis. and click View ➤ Systems. you create low pressure secondary supply air systems. indicating that it’s the active view.Design is highlighted. After creating the logical connection. When you highlight a space.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 92 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . A Revit MEP system is the logical connection between system components such as air terminals and mechanical equipment. click Training Files. verify that Design ➤ HVAC . and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_03_i. You create air systems by placing air terminals and mechanical equipment.

13 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 93 . Revit MEP assigned them to the Default Supply Air system. expand Mechanical ➤ Supply Air ➤ Mechanical Supply Air 1. Notice that a mechanical system now displays in the System Browser. 8 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Supply.IMPORTANT In the System Browser. 10 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. 15 Click Cancel. Connect Into. 12 In the System Browser. the number of elements is updated. 9 Click Modify Duct Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. System Name. 11 In the drawing area. 16 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. select the 3 supply diffusers shown in red and circled. review the Number of Elements. Note that the Flow value (1700 CFM) is equal to the sum of the flow values for the 4 diffusers you added to the system. and Flow value. Notice that there are layout and system tools (Generate Layout. and drag it to the bottom of the screen so that it displays horizontally below the floor plan. These tools vary depending on the equipment used to create a system. As you add diffusers to systems. and Create Systems) available on the Modify Air Terminals tab. Only mechanical equipment components can be highlighted and selected when you are using the Add To System tool. and then select the last supply diffuser in space 223. Create a secondary air system 7 In the drawing area. All of the diffusers (air terminals) that you added are located under default systems categories in the Unassigned folder. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy. the assigned diffusers move to the respective system folder. select the supply diffuser at the upper left of space 223. On the Options Bar. Because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed. 6 Keep the System Browser open.

The system name is updated from Mechanical Supply Air 1 to WSHP 2-45 in the System Browser. 27 Close the file with or without saving it. for Mark. Rename the system Next. you create ductwork to physically connect system components. You used the Create Supply Systems tool to logically connect air terminals to the WSHP. under Mechanical. highlight the value and click Ctrl+V to paste over the selection. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. 26 Click Finish Editing System. you rename the system to match the identifying data (Mark) of the equipment properties. and the system connects them. NOTE The organization of the Mechanical folder in the System Browser has changed so that the WSHP is the parent.17 Using the method learned previously. 94 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 22 Click OK. 23 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties. the air terminals are the children. for System Name. 19 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Select Equipment. 20 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Equipment Properties. In this exercise. under Identity Data. you also use the System Browser to validate systems. 25 Click OK. which updates the name in the System Browser. access system properties to see that the flow value (2125 CFM) has updated to include the flow value of the final supply diffuser. This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation. highlight the value (WSHP 2-45) and click Ctrl+C to copy it. you created low pressure secondary supply air systems for the building. 18 Click OK. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. In this exercise. and then select the WSHP (located outside the space).

Add ductwork using the Generate Layout tool 1 In the Project Browser.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . for Solution Type. select Network.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. In this case. select the upper left diffuser. Lines indicate the proposed duct layout (blue signifies a main duct line and green signifies a branch). 6 Use the Next Solution and Previous Solution arrows to scroll through the available solutions. the software recognizes the system components and sketches a temporary layout path connecting them. When you highlight a space using the cursor. A Generate Layout tab displays. click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser to display it. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . the Network type provides several solutions.rvt. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. click Training Files. Also. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner. 4 In the drawing area.Design is highlighted. 5 On the Options Bar. which provides various layout tools. each with branches off the main duct at 90-degree angles. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_04_i. 3 If the System Browser isn’t displayed. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 95 . and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. and display solution 1. indicating that it’s the active view.HVAC Plan. the space crossing lines display.

and use the drag control to drag it just to the left of the lighting fixtures. If there is not enough room for the software to create the necessary fittings. enter 9' 10 1/2".Round. For Duct Type. enter 3'. For Offset. as shown. 96 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . WARNING Be careful not to drag the main duct too close to the diffusers. Select Branch. select Flex Duct Round : Flex . For Flex Duct Type. click Settings. For Offset. 8 In the Duct Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Main. For Maximum Flex Duct Length. 9 On the Generate Layout panel. you’ll get an error in a later step.7 On the Options Bar. enter 9' 10 1/2". Click OK. 10 Select a vertical segment of the main duct. click Modify. select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees. select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees. For Duct Type.

as is the elbow itself.11 Click Finish Layout. All fittings required to connect the duct system to system components are automatically added. or offset elevations are incorrect. select a different layout solution. NOTE Errors may occur while attempting to create duct geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. The most common cause of these errors is that the duct usually has insufficient space to be created. or manually modify the duct. Either relocate the system components. The sketch lines are converted to ductwork. Remember to always check duct connectivity after modification. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 97 . a transition connecting the elbow is automatically added. For example.

The ductwork is a physical (not a logical) connection.Flow. 17 In the Type Properties dialog. and click to select it. thus it is not part of the system. Typically the disconnect results from not having enough room between the components that make the connection. Notice that the legend includes all possible values for the color scheme. Press Tab a third time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts. Modify the legend display 16 Select the color scheme legend. The first time you press Tab. for Color Scheme. press Tab twice to highlight the entire system. and equipment. 98 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . Add a color scheme legend 12 In the drawing area. 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Duct Legend. highlight a segment of the main duct. Press Tab a second time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts up to the first piece of connected equipment. you can verify connectivity as you create a system. the branch to which the duct is connected highlights. select By View. This disconnection will be located at the point where the highlighting stops. If the entire network does not highlight. 14 Click to the right of the system to place the legend. for Values Displayed. and then click OK. you check connectivity by moving the cursor over a segment of ductwork so that it highlights and then pressing Tab. Usually. fittings. but not all values are used in this view.NOTE Notice that the ductwork is not listed in the System Browser. Using a flow-based color scheme. and click OK. you can repair the connection by dragging the duct segment end point away from its current connection point and then dragging it back again to reconnect. You can delete ductwork and the system remains. 15 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. select Duct Color Fill . under Graphics. NOTE When multiple ducts and fittings are connected. a disconnection exists. and click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties.

and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. select the color scheme legend. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog. note the Air Flow value (2125 CFM). and notice that the flow value has updated with the change. Modify flow values 18 In the drawing area.The legend now shows only the color scheme values used in this view. under Mechanical . 25 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. select one of the diffusers in the system. The outflow for the WSHP is calculated as the sum of the airflows for all downstream air terminals. for Schemes. decrease the flow value by 100 CFM. and click OK. select the WSHP. 22 Close the Instance Properties dialog. Edit color scheme 23 In the drawing area. and on the Options Bar. 20 In the drawing area. and then press Esc to clear the selection.Airflow. and press Enter. Use the velocity-based color scheme as a visual reference to confirm that air is flowing through the system ductwork at the appropriate velocity.Velocity. 21 Access the instance properties for the WSHP. Notice that the color fill for the connected ductwork has updated. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 99 . 26 Click OK. for Flow. select Duct Color Fill . 24 Click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme.

and enter . you need to modify the layout: ■ ■ ■ In the warning dialog. If you get an error that there is not enough room to place the required fittings. Select Only. 100 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 29 In the Duct Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method. highlight a segment of the duct. click Cancel. Select Restrict Height. and drag it to the right. press Tab 3 times to highlight the entire system (including the WSHP). 28 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing.08 in-wg/100ft. Repeat the steps necessary to select the entire system and then size it. select Friction. Click OK. select Calculated Size Only. Select the upper segment of main duct.Calculate duct sizes 27 In the drawing area. The flow information graphically represents the properties of duct systems so that you can easily identify problems with the system. and then click to select it. The ductwork and fittings are updated. and select 16". for Branch Sizing. Under Constraints.

33 Move the cursor over the system components. and pressure loss) to find deficiencies in the system. and pressure loss. Ductwork and system components must be connected to a system (logical connection). 31 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector. The selected system components or duct must be logically and physically connected for you to use the System Inspector to inspect airflow and pressure inside ductwork. Notice that the ribbon now displays a System Inspector tab. Using this tool. 32 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect. Use the information that displays (flow. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 101 . static pressure. and a system must contain ductwork (physical connection). you can target problem areas directly in your design and resolve them.Inspect the system The System Inspector is a tool that lets you place the cursor over each system to inspect it for airflow. pressure. so that you can modify the system design accordingly. 30 Select one of the ducts in the supply air system.

rvt. Red information and arrows indicate the highest percentage of pressure loss due to friction. 34 Zoom in to various parts of the system and verify that the flow arrows are correct. 102 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . In the left pane of the Open dialog. 35 Click Finish. 36 Close the file with or without saving it. Manually Creating Ductwork In this exercise. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_05_i. You also convert rigid duct into specified lengths of flex duct. remember that all information is color-coded according to pressure. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. you modify existing ductwork and then use the Connect Into tool to connect components to the existing air system. also known as the critical path.NOTE As you inspect a system.

Manually Creating Ductwork | 103 .Design is highlighted.HVAC Plan . 5 Press Spacebar to make the new duct match the WSHP duct size and location. indicating that it’s the active view. and click Draw Duct. 3 Right-click the supply air connector (the connector facing the room’s double doors). and click to specify the end of the main duct. 7 Move the cursor to just below the lowest set of diffusers.Manually create main duct line 1 In the Project Browser. 4 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Element panel. and select the WSHP.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 6 Click midway between the 2 top light fixtures to specify the end of the first segment of the main duct. and select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows / Beveled Taps from the Type Selector drop-down. 2 Zoom in to space Instruction 115 in the lower left corner.

use the connector grip to quickly and accurately locate a connector. 13 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 11 On the Options Bar. Front. The software accounts for the difference in height from the diffuser connector to the specified offset height.8 Press Esc twice to end the command. 14 In the Project Browser. right-click the connector grip. select 9' 10 1/2". select the top right diffuser. for Offset. and click Draw Duct. Click this corner Resulting view orientation 104 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems .Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ Level 1 . 12 End the branch by clicking at the intersection of the branch duct and the main duct. Create branch duct lines 9 To begin branch duct. NOTE When drawing duct. 15 On the ViewCube. double-click MEP . and Left sides converge in order to orient the view as shown. 10 Select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows/Taps from the Type Selector drop-down.3D MEP. Connect the remaining diffusers using the Connect Into tool The Connect Into tool is used to add or connect components to an existing air system. click the corner where the Top.

16 Zoom in to space Instruction 115. it is considered a closed loop. Also. 17 Tile the windows so that you can view results in 3D as you add duct in 2D. Because this branch has 2 end points (the diffuser and the connector into the main duct). 19 In the drawing area. 21 Click the main supply duct to select it as the duct to connect into. the color fill indicates the flow value. 20 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. in space 115. The ductwork is automatically created. Manually Creating Ductwork | 105 . and is sized appropriately for the neck size of the diffuser. select the top unconnected supply diffuser. connect the remaining diffusers to the main duct. 22 Using the same method. 18 Make the floor plan the active view.

Revit MEP displays a warning that the flex duct that was created exceeds the Maximum Flex Duct setting in the Mechanical Settings dialog. 24 Select the remaining diffusers. 106 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems .Branch ductwork in 2D Convert duct to flex duct 23 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Convert to Flex Duct. 25 Press Esc. zoom in to the open end of the main duct. A portion of the rigid ductwork is converted to Flex Duct. and select the top left diffuser. You can ignore the warning. Branch ductwork in 3D Add an endcap 26 In the plan view.

30 Press Esc twice. and then click Modify. Size ductwork 34 Highlight a section of the main duct (which is now split). 28 Select Rectangular Endcap : Standard from the Type Selector drop-down. Endcap in 3D Split and size main duct 31 Maximize the plan view. Manually Creating Ductwork | 107 . you need to add an endcap to create a closed loop. 32 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Split. 33 Click on the main duct below the top set of diffusers as shown. press Tab to highlight the entire main duct run.To ensure that the system has proper flow propagation and accurate system calculations. 27 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Duct Fitting. and click to select it. 29 Click the endpoint snap of the main duct.

select a segment of the main duct. Verify duct sizing 38 In the drawing area. clear Restrict Height. under Constraints. under Mechanical . for Flow. The ductwork is sized to provide appropriate CFM value for the system. This height constraint is used when you place duct in a restricted space. 37 Press Esc to clear the selection. and click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. verify that the value is the total of the diffusers supplied by that segment of duct. 108 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 39 In the Instance Properties dialog. and then click OK. 40 Using the same method.35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. 36 In the Duct Sizing dialog. and click OK. verify the flow rate for the remaining segments of the main duct. 41 Close the file with or without saving it.Airflow. such as a plenum.

you create a hydronic piping system that is designed to run in a cooling mode and a heating mode. Automatically and manually lay out piping. This system is modeled to accommodate full system flow through a boiler.Designing a Mechanical Piping System 6 In this lesson. In this lesson. Create return and supply piping systems. or to bypass the cooling tower during heating mode. You begin the piping system design by placing water source heat pumps and a boiler on level 3 of the building model. Add valves to allow the overall piping system to work in 2 modes: cooling and heating. you learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment. Then. using modulating valves to divert through the cooling tower during cooling mode. Use the System Browser to review the piping systems. Inspect and validate the piping systems and physical connections. 109 . additional water source heat pumps from level 1. you create the systems and piping to logically and physically connect the system components. including 2 base mounted pumps. Use a color-coded display to verify and adjust pipe sizing. and a cooling tower located on the roof.

click Training Files.Level 3 mechanical piping system Adding Mechanical Equipment In this exercise. including 2 water source heat pumps (WSHP) and a condensing boiler. on level 3 of the building model.rvt. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you place mechanical equipment. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_01_i. 110 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .

7 On the Options Bar.High Efficiency . indicating that it’s the active view.Design is highlighted. 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned. and select WSHP . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . NOTE Although space tags are not included in this view.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . verify that Wall faces is selected. in corridor 328.Adding air side equipment 1 In the Project Browser.HVAC Plan . you can identify a space by placing the cursor over the space component.Horizontal . 2 Zoom in to the right side of the shorter building wing.2-6 Tons .Left Return . Adding Mechanical Equipment | 111 . 5 Press Spacebar to rotate the component. A tooltip and the status bar (located at the lower left of the window) confirm the space name and number. 4 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel. as shown. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment.Right Discharge : 6 Ton from the Type Selector drop-down. and click to place it in the shorter wing of the building.

13 Place another WSHP to the left of the one you just placed. verify that the WSHP is still selected.) 112 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and click to place the dimension. 12 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. as shown. as shown. (Use the alignment sketch graphics to position the second WSHP the same distance from the corridor wall as the first. click the top edge of the WSHP. and enter 2'. 10 Select the WSHP. click the dimension. 11 Press Enter and then press Esc. and in the Type Selector. 9 Click Place Dimensions tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.8 Click the corridor wall face.

Add water side equipment 18 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. Click OK. and click to place it in the mechanical room. for Offset. 19 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel. enter 12 GPM. as shown. enter 9'. select the 2 WSHPs. 20 Press Spacebar 3 times to rotate the component. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints. Under Mechanical. and select Condensing Boiler : 500 MBH from the Type Selector drop-down. Modify WSHP parameters 15 While pressing Ctrl. 17 Press Esc to clear the selection. and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. for Water Flow. Adding Mechanical Equipment | 113 . above and to the left of the Base Mounted Pump.14 Click Modify.

21 Click Modify. and use the System Browser to review and confirm the systems. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses. Create pipes to physically connect the system components. Create the logical connection between the system components. including flow and pressure. The recommended workflow to create piping systems is to: ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment and other system components. 22 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating a Piping System In this exercise. 114 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . you create the return and supply piping systems. A system is the logical connection between system components such as water source heat pumps (WSHPs) and a boiler.

but without a corresponding system. 4 Click the titlebar for the System Browser window. In the left pane of the Open dialog. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 5 In the System Browser.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . Unlike logical connections (systems). 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. Chilled water supply system: 2 WSHPs and a cooling tower Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. and click View ➤ Piping. and drag the window down so it displays along the bottom of the screen.rvt. Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser. This display option allows you to simplify the browser view by showing only the Piping discipline.Design is highlighted. analyses cannot be performed. 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space .IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. Creating a Piping System | 115 .HVAC Plan . and expand the Default Hydronic Supply 1 and the Default Hydronic Return 1 systems to view the mechanical equipment placed in the building. where it is easier to review the information.Mech 330). and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_02_i. You can create pipes to connect system components. indicating that it’s the active view. click Training Files. right-click the Systems column heading. physical connections (pipes) are not required for systems creation. 6 Expand the Unassigned folder.

9 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. select the boiler. select the 2 WSHPs. TIP If you clicked outside of the drawing area.In the System Browser. the System Equipment is Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. 11 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. 116 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Therefore. 12 In the drawing area. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. and the Edit System tool is not active. After you placed the WSHPs and boiler. You assign a system component to a system either by: ■ ■ Creating a logical connection (system) between the system components. A red dashed line connects the 2 WSHPs in the drawing. 10 On the Options Bar. Equipment that remains in a default system is included in heating and cooling loads calculations. for System Name. Notice that on the Options Bar. They remain in the Default systems category until you assign them to a system. Create the hydronic return piping system 7 In the drawing area. This display indicates that the system is selected. the assigned equipment moves from the Unassigned folder to the respective assigned system folder. IMPORTANT All mechanical equipment in the project should be assigned to a system other than a default system. Revit MEP immediately assigned them to the Default Hydronic Return and Default Hydronic Supply systems category located in the Unassigned folder. leaving a large number of components in a default system can hinder performance and prevent accurate calculations for the systems where they should have been assigned. enter CHWR to represent Chilled Water Return. Assigning a system component to an existing system. while pressing Ctrl. 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Return. As you assign equipment to systems. select one of the WSHPs that you added to the system to activate this tool and the other options on the Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy according to the system that you assigned to them. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems.

Notice that the Hydronic Return option does not display because the selected component already has a hydronic return system assigned to it.Design. 19 In the Project Browser. 20 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System.Design ➤ Floor Plans. Create the hydronic supply piping system 14 Select one of the WSHPs that you placed previously. and select the second WSHP to add it to the supply system.) 16 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 21 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building. 18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. for System Name. (You can click the Piping Systems tab to access the Return System properties. Creating a Piping System | 117 .HVAC Plan . double-click Roof .13 Click Finish Editing System. 15 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Supply. and select the cooling tower. under Design ➤ HVAC . 17 On the Options Bar. enter CHWS to represent Chilled Water Supply. You have created the hydronic return system.

28 Using the same method. and click OK. select Connector 1 : Undefined : Round : 4'' : Cooling Water Supply In. expand the Hydronic Return system category. 118 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 26 Click Finish Editing System.22 In the Select Connector dialog. the cooling tower provides cooled water to the system. right-click the Hydronic Supply system category. indicating the logical connection. and click Expand All. You can now view the systems hierarchy: CHWR and CHWS logically connect the boiler (parent) with the WSHPs (children). IMPORTANT The new system named CHWS is now listed in the System Browser under Hydronic Supply ➤ Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. and bypasses the cooling tower. the water returns through the boiler into the cooling tower by way of the WSHPs. In heating mode. 29 Right-click CHWS. the boiler supplies heated water to the system. Notice that the Options Bar indicates 3 for the Number of Elements. 24 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. The CHWS system contains the 2 WSHPs and the cooling tower. You select the boiler as equipment for supply to the WSHPs. The boiler is the only equipment that has connectors with compatible system types (hydronic supply and hydronic return). 25 Select the boiler. The hydronic supply system highlights in red. 23 Close the roof plan view. In cooling mode. and click Select. Confirm and validate the systems 27 In the System Browser.

expand Piping. for Water Flow. and click OK. 32 In the System Browser. under Mechanical. 33 In the Instance Properties dialog. you create the physical connections in the pipe system automatically using the Generate Layout tool. 34 Close the file with or without saving it. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout In this exercise. 31 In the Column Settings dialog. and click OK. 30 Right-click the Systems column heading. select Fluid Type and Fluid Temperature. You can select the columns that you want to display in the System Browser. including the flow rate and size of the component. you can view several parameters. The CHWS Flow value is updated in the System Browser. You also manually modify the layout path as required. right-click the Flow value for one of the WSHPs in the CHWS system. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 119 . and click Properties. and click Column Settings. enter 18 GPM.In the System Browser.

Revit MEP provides several solutions from which to choose.rvt.HVAC Plan . click Check None. press Tab to highlight the system. 120 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . A system preview displays in red.HVAC plan view range are highlighted. When you draw a box to select components. then the Select a System dialog displays. click Training Files. select Mechanical Equipment. indicating that it’s the active view. TIP Instead of selecting all components and filtering. 9 In the Select a System dialog. 6 Press Esc to clear the selection. The layout path solutions display with the main in blue and the branch in green. and the 2 base mounted pumps are selected (and display in red). In the left pane of the Open dialog. Notice that all components within the Level 3 . and then click OK to create a layout for the currently selected system. The level 3 water source heat pumps (WSHPs). You use an alternate method of selecting the system in the next steps. you can place the cursor over a system component. You select a system in the dialog to view it in the drawing. the boiler. Select components with the Filter tool 1 In the Project Browser. you are selecting all components within the view range of the active view.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . and the selected system components are already connected to more than one system (because they have multiple system connectors). and click to select it. Create the Level 3 return pipe layout 7 Select a WSHP. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_03_i.Mech 330).Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. and click OK. drag the cursor to the lower right corner to draw a selection box around the floor plan. 2 Beginning outside the building at the upper left corner.Design is highlighted. IMPORTANT If you select system components to create a pipe layout. 4 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 3 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space . 5 In the Filter dialog. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 10 Click OK. select CHWR. 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout.

IMPORTANT The branch offset lets you automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. or architectural components. select Perimeter. ■ ■ Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 121 . you can change the pipe type and the vertical offset at which the piping will automatically be created. It does not reference the architecture. click Settings. For Inset. structural beams. duct. You can modify this value for the main and branch elevations. This functionality is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. 12 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. verify that Solutions is selected. enter 1' 6''. The perimeter solution creates a layout that runs parallel (along a perimeter) to the connectors of the selected system components.11 On the Options Bar. verify that the Offset value for the Main and for the Branch is 10' 0''. 13 Click Cancel. In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. 15 On the Options Bar: ■ For Solution Type. 14 On the Generate Layout tab. Click (Next Solution) until solution 4 of 5 is selected.

the Status Bar displays the components being highlighted: ■ ■ ■ Branch in a pipe network. and press Tab 3 times. you modified the flow value for the WSHPs. Branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment.16 Click Finish Layout. With each Tab. Verify the flow In a previous exercise. Branch in a pipe network including the branch objects. select the pipe connecting the WSHP on the right to the boiler. 122 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. View the Status Bar to verify the branch option currently displayed. 19 In the drawing area. 17 Optionally. the flow for one WSHP is 18. to display the path with thinner lines. 18 Place the cursor over the piping. and the flow for the other is 12. The piping is automatically created along with the appropriate connectors and fittings so that all of the piping segments are connected to equipment.

under Mechanical. The flow from the 2 WSHPs travels into the boiler. and click OK. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click OK. and access its instance properties. 22 Select the boiler. This value indicates the total of the flow for the 2 WSHPs (18 GPM + 12 GPM). 23 Under Mechanical. Add the Level 1 WSHPs to the return system 25 Select the WSHP on the left. notice that the Water Flow is 30 GPM. 24 Press Esc.The flow through this pipe should equal the flow of both WSHPs. verify that the value for Flow is 30 GPM. 20 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 123 .

which propagates flow throughout the system. 32 Click Finish Editing System. and zoom to fit the drawing in the view. double-click Level 1 . 29 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. 33 Zoom in to the piping that comes from the floor below. you logically added Level 1 WSHPs to the CHWR System. the Level 1 WSHPs are connected to the chilled water return system (CHWR). Physically connect the multi-level WSHPs Previously. the Number of Elements is now 8. click Edit System. 27 On the System Tools panel. Logically.26 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. 28 In the Project Browser. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 124 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .HVAC Plan . On the Options Bar. and verify that CHWR is selected from the System Selector drop-down. you physically close the CHWR loop.Design. 30 Draw a selection window to select the 6 WSHPs.Design ➤ Floor Plans. Next. 31 Close the Level 1 plan view.

37 In the Instance Properties dialog. and the flow coming from Level 1 is 95 GPM. and click Cancel. NOTE For the purposes of this tutorial. Manually modify piping in layout mode 39 In the drawing area. and then close the Instance Properties dialog. the 6 WSHPs from Level 1 have already been added to the chilled water supply system (CHWS). extend the pipe to the left until it connects to the center line of the existing pipe at the horizontal and nearest snap. so the total flow of 125 GPM indicates that the flow has propagated correctly. 38 Using the same method.34 Select the bottom piece of horizontal pipe. access its instance properties. select a WSHP. note that the value for Flow is 95 GPM. 35 Using the drag control. The fittings are automatically created to connect to the return piping coming from below. review the properties for the boiler to verify that the Water Flow value is 125 GPM. and then click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. The Level 3 WSHPs generate a flow of 30 GPM. as shown. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 125 . under Mechanical. Verify the flow from the lower level 36 With the new pipe selected.

select Perimeter 1 of 5. For Slope.40 In the Select a System dialog. Click Settings. 42 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Solution Type. 126 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . select CHWS. enter 9' 6'' for both the Main Offset and the Branch Offset. 44 Click the boiler to remove it from the layout path solution. The inset is the distance from the pipe to the connection on the selected system component. and then click OK. enter 1' 6''. enter 0''/12''. In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. 45 Click the supply pipe from the cooling tower above. For Inset. ■ ■ 43 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Remove. 41 Click OK.

47 In the drawing area. select the vertical sketch line just above the one you already selected. and drag it to the left (just to the right of the double door in the underlay).) 49 Select the 4-way arrow control. as shown. as shown. you connect the boiler to parallel-connected base mounted pumps. 48 While pressing Ctrl. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 127 . (Both sections are at the same elevation. select the right vertical green sketch line in the path.The boiler and cooling tower are no longer included in the layout path. 46 Click Modify. In a later exercise.

Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout In this exercise. Connect the cooling tower into the supply system to maintain the closed loop. Add piping to close the supply loop. NOTE Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. 51 Click Finish Layout. 128 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . or manually modify the pipe.50 Using the same method. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. You tile a plan view and a 3D view to simultaneously create the pipe (physical) connections and validate the pipe geometry. 52 Close the file with or without saving it. select a different layout solution. The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe. or offset elevations are incorrect. you: ■ ■ ■ ■ Connect the boiler to the return piping. you manually lay out piping to create a closed loop system. Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel to the system. select the short vertical path line connecting the right WSHP (in the same location as the short segment of pipe). To create the piping system. Either relocate the system components. and drag it to the right to align it with the sketch lines you just moved.

double-click 3D HVAC Building.rvt. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 129 . as shown. 4 Adjust the view in both windows (use the ViewCube and Zoom tools) to see the connections on the boiler. 2 Under Design ➤ HVAC .Design ➤ 3D Views. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_04_i.NOTE Default color filters for the Hydronic Supply and Hydronic Return have already been specified for this project in the Visibility Graphic Overrides dialog. you will notice that the supply pipes are dark purple. You may find it helpful to view the system in both plan and 3D during design and validation. click Training Files. As you work in the training file. Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . Sometimes (such as during vertical alignment) it’s easier to select components in 3D. In the left pane of the Open dialog. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and the return pipes are magenta. indicating that it’s the active view.HVAC Plan .Design is highlighted. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.

Modify return piping to accommodate supply piping 5 In the 3D view. select the section of piping. as shown. 7 In the plan view. 130 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . draw a selection window around the elbow fitting and the small piece of pipe connecting into the boiler return connector. 6 Press Delete.

■ Move the cursor up 4''. ■ Click to move the piping. and press Esc to clear the selection. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 131 .8 Move the piping: ■ ■ Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. Click to specify the reference point. 9 In the 3D view. 10 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. select the boiler.

The connections are automatically created. Plan view of return piping connection to the boiler Connect the primary base mounted pump to the boiler Two base mounted pumps are included in the system.You use this tool on components with connectors to automatically create piping between the component and the existing system. select the return pipe riser. The tool also automatically creates the appropriate fittings. 11 In the Select Connector dialog. The top base mounted pump in the plan view is primary. select the boiler. and click Draw Pipe. An automatic flow valve will be used to direct the flow from the boiler to the 2 pumps. flow will propagate through the connecting pipe and be assigned to the appropriate system based on the connector to which it is connected. 14 Right-click the grip that represents the supply connector (top). and click OK. 132 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . click Connector 2 : Hydronic Return : Round : 2'' : Cold Water In. 12 In the 3D view. 13 In the plan view. and the lower one is secondary. and the boiler is connected to the return piping. Using the Connect Into tool ensures that if the connection is successful.

and you select 1 connector. ■ Move the cursor down. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 133 . You can input dimensions as you draw pipe to ensure specific length segments. enter 2'. 16 Press Spacebar to acquire offset and pipe diameter values from the connector.In a plan view. and press Enter. the Select Connector dialog displays prompting you to select the return or the supply connector. 17 Draw the piping: ■ Move the cursor to the right. for Offset.7''. enter 1' . and select Pipe Types: Standard from the Type Selector drop-down. and click just before the midway point on the primary base mounted pump. if a component has 2 connectors that are not connected to piping. Add another 2' section of pipe to the right. ■ ■ On the Options Bar. 15 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel.

18 Press Esc twice. and the appropriate fittings are created. 21 In the Select Connector dialog. Notice in the 3D view that the specified offset dropped the horizontal run down. Upgrade a fitting 23 Zoom in to the elbow fitting.NOTE The Automatically Connect option attempts to connect piping that is positioned within a specified range. select Connector 2 : Undefined: Round: 3''. The pipe is automatically connected to the base mounted pump. select the primary base mounted pump. 19 In the plan view. and click OK. As you place piping runs that are close together. as shown. 134 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and select it. 20 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. it may be helpful to switch Automatically Connect off to avoid unintended piping connections. 22 Select the last segment of pipe you drew.

29 If necessary. 28 Press Esc. 27 Move the cursor to the right. right-click the bottom connector.24 Click the bottom plus symbol to upgrade the fitting from an elbow to a tee. NOTE To downgrade from a tee fitting to an elbow. zoom out in the 3D view to see the new connections. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 135 . and click Draw Pipe. and click to draw the pipe. and click the minus symbol. 26 Move the cursor down until the Status Bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection of the base mounted pump. and when the connector point displays. click to connect to the pump. Connect the secondary base mounted pump 25 Select the tee fitting. you select the tee fitting.

select the primary base mounted pump. 33 Press Esc. enter 4'. 32 Move the cursor down until it joins the connector point on the secondary base mounted pump. and click to create the pipe. 31 On the Options Bar. and click Draw Pipe. for Offset. 136 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel 30 In the plan view. right-click the discharge connector.

as shown. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 137 . zoom in to the elbow fitting on the left (secondary) base mounted pump.Notice that you do not have to draw the 2 vertical pipes to connect to the pumps. these pipe connections were created automatically. upgrade the fitting to a tee connector. 35 Using the method learned previously. 3D view of parallel-connected base mounted pumps Add pipe to create a closed loop system 34 In the 3D view.

36 Draw pipe to connect the base mounted pipes to the return: ■ In the plan view. select the tee connector in the secondary base mounted pump. right-click the bottom control on the tee. ■ Move the cursor down. and click to create the pipe. Move the cursor down until the status bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection and vertical with the pipe shown. 138 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and click Draw Pipe. and press Enter. ■ ■ On the Options Bar. for Offset. type 1'. enter 9' 6''.

Next. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 139 . select the pipe from the secondary base mounted pump to the supply pipe. you validate the flow through the system. right-click. You now have a closed loop system.37 Click Modify. and click Element Properties. Validate flow propagation through the supply system 38 In the plan view.

When you create the pumps in parallel. The flow is being propagated through the piping. Connect the cooling tower Next. 47 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Extend drop-down ➤ Trim/Extend Multiple Elements.50 or 50% of the Flow. select the cooling tower. you physically connect the cooling tower piping to propagate flow. under Mechanical. select the following pipes: ■ Supply pipe. under Mechanical. 41 Using the same method.39 In the Instance Properties dialog. you can specify the Flow Factors for the 2 pumps as any combination that adds up to 100%. 42 Click OK. 45 In the Instance Properties dialog. notice that Flow is 125 GPM. 48 In the plan view. 44 In the 3D view. the value is 0 GPM. and click OK. In the Instance Properties dialog. and click Element Properties. The Flow Factor for the primary pump is set to 50% also. view the properties for the secondary pump. as shown. 40 Click Cancel. notice that under Mechanical. for Cooling Water Flow. notice that the Flow Factor is a parameter that is . 140 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Flow is not currently passing through the cooling tower because it is not yet connected to the hydronic piping system. which is rounded up to 63 GPM (1/2 of 125 GPM). The cooling tower propagates flow through the inlet and outlet connectors. right-click. 43 Press Esc. ■ Upper pipe going to the cooling tower (inlet). 46 Press Esc.

Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 141 .■ Lower pipe (outlet). NOTE Piping colors update based on specified filters. 49 Press Esc. Both pipes for the cooling tower are automatically connected to the piping system.

and open the Instance Properties dialog to validate that the flow is propagating correctly through the cooling tower. When the valve is open. and close the dialog. You add a bypass valve to stop the flow and direct it to the cooling tower (cooling mode). 51 Verify that the value for Cooling Water Flow is 125 GPM.rvt. click Training Files. You also add shut-off valves to control the flow to and from the cooling tower. 142 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and is heated by the boiler. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_05_i. the water bypasses the cooling tower. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you add valves to model the piping for 2 modes: cooling mode and heating mode. select the cooling tower. Adding Valves In this exercise. 52 Close the file with or without saving it.50 In the 3D View.

verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .2-6 Inch Bypass : 3'' from the Type Selector drop-down.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building. indicating that it’s the active view. Adding Valves | 143 . Rotate the valve 9 Select the valve.Place a bypass valve to control flow to the cooling tower 1 In the Project Browser. and select Ball Valve . 7 Click the center of the pipe to place the valve. 8 Press Esc twice.Design is highlighted. 6 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Element panel. The bypass valve is closed by default. 4 On the Options Bar.HVAC Plan . and click the top Rotate control to rotate the valve to a horizontal position. NOTE Be careful to select a bypass valve in this step. 3 Click the section of pipe between the supply in and supply out pipes to the cooling tower. as shown. verify that the Diameter value is 3''. 5 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory.

Place shut-off valves 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory.2-6 Inch Bypass : 4'' valve on the return pipe for the cooling tower. 14 Using the same method. 13 Click to place the valve at the midpoint of the supply pipe to the cooling tower. place another Ball Valve . parallel to the previously placed valve. 144 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 15 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.2-6 Inch : 4'' from the Type Selector drop-down. 12 Select Ball Valve .10 Press Esc.

validate that the Flow is 125 GPM. you want to shut off the flow of water into the cooling tower. validate that the Flow value is 0 GPM. and click Element Properties. verify that Flow is 0 GPM.Rotate both valves 16 Click the top Rotate control to the left of each valve to rotate the valve as shown. validate that the Flow is 125 GPM.) 21 Select the 2 regular valves (in open position). right-click. You add valves to the cooling tower to enable the system to alternately run in heating mode.2-6 Inch Bypass : 3'' from the Type Selector drop-down. For the bottom horizontal pipe (flow from the cooling tower). (This valve allows the water to flow through it. 20 Select the bypass valve.2-6 Inch : 3'' from the Type Selector drop-down. and select Ball Valve . under Mechanical. and click OK. You bypass the cooling tower with hot water coming from the boiler. 18 In the Instance Properties dialog. Add valves to facilitate a dual mode system 17 Select the small piece of pipe above the bypass valve. For the top horizontal pipe (flow to the cooling tower). Modify valves to bypass the cooling tower Currently the system is designed to run in cooling mode. Adding Valves | 145 . validate the following flow values: ■ ■ ■ For the pipe below the bypass valve. and select Ball Valve . In heating mode. 19 Using the same method.

23 Close the file with or without saving it. Sizing Pipe In this exercise. indicating that it’s the active view. The color-coded display allows you to quickly see differing sizes and flow of piping.HVAC Plan .22 Using the method you just learned. 146 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 .Design is highlighted. validate the following: ■ ■ ■ The flow going into the cooling tower is 0 GPM. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Pipe Legend. you verify automatically calculated pipe size and flow parameters. Display the pipe color scheme legend 1 In the Project Browser. as shown. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_06_i. You then use a combination of friction and velocity to size the pipes appropriately. 3 Click to place the color scheme legend in the area to the right of the piping system. The flow coming out of the cooling tower is 0 GPM. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . you use the pipe color scheme legend as a color-coded reference to view the flow within the pipes and the sizing. The flow traveling through the bypass section of pipe is 125 GPM. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. Initially.rvt.

Size.4 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. and click OK. 5 Compare the legend to the color coding in the drawing to verify that the flow values are as expected. select Pipe Color Fill . This display will help you size the pipe using friction and velocity sizing methods. This option displays the pipes in colors based on flow values. 7 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. for Schemes. and click OK. 8 Press Esc to clear the selection. click Pipe Color Fill . Display the color fill based on pipe size 6 Select the Color Scheme Legend. and click Modify Pipe Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. Sizing Pipe | 147 .Flow.

10 Move the cursor over the pipe between the primary and secondary base mounted pumps. The piping increases in diameter based on the friction and velocity values specified. Select And. It does not report the sizing settings of the selected pipe segment or pipe run.25 FT/100ft. for Branch Sizing. select Friction. IMPORTANT The Pipe Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used. and click to select the branch.Size the pipe using friction and velocity methods 9 Zoom in to the section of pipe connecting the boiler to the parallel base mounted pumps. select Larger of Connector and Calculated. 12 In the Pipe Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method. enter 5 FPS. 11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. 13 Press Esc. press Tab 3 times (so that the status bar indicates that you’ve highlighted a branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment). Click OK. 148 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and for Velocity. Under Constraints. and enter 2.

Inspect the system 1 In the Project Browser. select a different layout solution. Inspecting the System | 149 . Using the System Inspector. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. or offset elevations are incorrect. Inspecting the System In this exercise.rvt. 2 Select the section of the return piping (magenta) between the 2 water source heat pumps on the upper level.Design ➤ 3D Views. Either relocate the system components. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 14 Close the file with or without saving it.IMPORTANT Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. pressure. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_07_i. The System Inspector lets you inspect each piping system for flow. or manually modify the pipe. The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe. and pressure loss by placing the cursor over a pipe or mechanical equipment that you assigned to the system. you use the System Inspector to inspect the Level 3 hydronic piping system. you can easily detect problem areas in your design and resolve them immediately. and double-click 3D HVAC Building.

NOTE To use the System Inspector to inspect flow and pressure inside pipe. 5 Place the cursor over the same section of return piping. An inspection flag reports the section number. This information helps you modify the system design. 4 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect. the selected system components and pipe must be logically and physically connected. as required. 150 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . flow. and pressure information including pressure loss. The pipe and the system components must be connected to a system (logical connection) and a system must contain pipe (physical connection). The critical flow (indicated by red arrows) is in the main line going to the boiler. NOTE Zoom in to the piping to see the arrows clearly. Arrows display on the pipe indicating the flow direction for both the main and the branches in the pipe system.3 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector.

Note that the Flow is 80 GPM. Checking Piping Systems | 151 . Checking Piping Systems Revit MEP uses both the pipe geometry and the system to perform calculations such as flow and pressure. for Fluid Temperature. you need to validate them. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click OK. you use the Check Pipe Systems tool to quickly check these connections for all systems throughout your project. the Static Pressure is 7. and the Pressure Loss is 1. as shown. Training File ■ Click ➤ Open. and notice that the Static Pressure is 7. inspect Section 6 again. Because both the logical (system) and physical (pipe) connections play a vital role in the overall systems design.89 psi.88 psi. 9 Using the same method. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. 10 Click Finish.67 psi. targeting those systems that need attention. In this exercise.65 psi and the Pressure Loss is 1. 7 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Properties. and to size pipe. select 90° F.Modify fluid temperature 6 Place the cursor over the section of pipe (Section 6) between the 2 WSHPs on the lower level.

A dialog lets you click Show multiple times for different views. NOTE The check systems warnings contain a system type and a description. 152 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 5 Verify that Systems and Piping are selected. Perform a systems check 1 In the Project Browser. These warnings can refer to both physical connection issues (such as a disconnected or problematic pipe) or logical connection issues (such as an improperly assigned system).HVAC Plan . thus assigning the components to a system. expand the Hydronic Supply folder and notice that the Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH is listed. and for pipe sizing. Pipe geometry is used for system flow and pressure calculations. 6 In the Project Browser. Revit MEP moves them from the Unassigned folder to their assigned systems folder. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_i. double-click Level 1 . You will check the mechanical piping components to learn how to use the System Browser to confirm specified and default system assignments. all system components must be assigned to a system after they are placed. the water source heat pump is listed in the assigned system and assigned to the Default Hydronic Sanitary system in the Unassigned folder. As you learned when placing components. right-click the Systems titlebar. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . After you assign components to a system. 4 In the System Browser.rvt.Design. but the same component has a sanitary system connector that you have not assigned to a system. IMPORTANT The most common check systems warning is: default system is not empty. 8 Expand Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. In the System Browser. The default system is placed in the Unassigned folder until you select the system components and create a system for them. Warnings display. Remember that after you create pipe to physically connect a system. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Pipe Systems. and you have not yet assigned the component to the other systems.Design ➤ Floor Plans.Design. the Unassigned folder will be empty and Check Pipe Systems will no longer display not empty warnings. and click Show to view all of the system components. Note that only physical connections associated with an assigned system are checked. If you place components without assigning them to a system. 9 Right-click CHWS. and double-click Level 3 . 7 In the System Browser. Notice that these warnings indicate that the Default systems are not empty.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. After you have assigned all components to systems. Revit MEP checks both the logical (system) and the physical (pipe) connections of each piping system throughout the project. Use the System Browser to confirm piping system assignments 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser.HVAC Plan . Note that a system component may be listed in both its assigned system and in the Unassigned folder.Design ➤ Floor Plans. For example. Pipe that is associated with a default system (located in the Unassigned folder) is not checked. and click View. the pipe is associated with that system. click Training Files. you assigned a water source heat pump to a supply hydronic system. Revit MEP creates a default system and assigns them to it in order to perform system calculations. under which the mechanical equipment that was assigned to the system is listed. This occurs when the assigned system component can be connected to multiple systems (it contains different system connectors). The dashed red lines represent the logical connection. notice the CHWS (Chilled Water Supply System) is listed.

HVAC Plan . 12 In the System Browser. The return system that you created (CHWR) is listed along with the boiler and the water source heat pumps (WSHPs) that you assigned to this system. and confirm unassigned system components.Design floor plan. 13 Right-click CHWR. Checking Piping Systems | 153 . right-click Hydronic Return. confirm the system and the system assignments for the Hydronic Supply system. 10 Using the same methods. 14 Using the methods that you learned. otherwise. you can click Show in the Show Element(s) In View dialog to switch between views.TIP If you have multiple views open. 15 Close the file with or without saving it. and click Select to confirm this system and the assigned system components. and select Level 3 . 11 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Switch Windows drop-down. and click Expand All. click Close. expand the Unassigned folder. You have confirmed and validated both unassigned and assigned system components and their systems.

154 .

you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design an electrical system.Creating an Electrical System In this tutorial. 155 .

156 .

Define required lighting. Assign space color fills according to required lighting levels. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ Specify electrical settings. Color fill plan with required lighting levels ■ Create a space lighting analysis schedule 157 . you complete the planning tasks associated with creating an electrical system.Planning an Electrical System 7 In this lesson.

rvt. click Training Files. select Copper. and demand factors that are applied in the design. select 75. Add a correction factor 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. 2 In the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane. speeding up the design phase. distribution systems. ■ Click New Correction Factor. For Temperature. Add a wiring type 3 In the left pane.Wire Sizes. enter 1. In this exercise you review electrical settings. Click OK.04. click (Open). select 90. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 158 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System .Specifying Electrical Settings Electrical settings determine the voltages. expand Wiring . Revit MEP checks to ensure that components are compatible with the specified voltages and distribution systems. 4 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. As you place components and create circuits. You also add a wiring type. enter THHN. ■ ■ For Material. For Temperature Rating. Select Correction Factor. select Copper. wiring. ■ ■ For Factor. For Material. and open Imperial\RME_Elec_Planning_01_i. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select Wiring Types.

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Insulation, select THHN. For Max Size, enter 2000. For Neutral Multiplier, enter 1.0. Select Neutral Required. For Neutral Size, select Hot Conductor Size. For Conduit Type, select Steel.

Add a voltage definition 5 In the left pane, select Voltage Definitions. The Voltage Definitions table is used to specify a range of voltages that are used with your voltage definitions. By specifying a range, you allow circuits to be created between components with rated voltages that do not precisely match the voltage definition value. 6 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter 240. For Value, enter 240. For Minimum, enter 220. For Maximum, enter 250.

Add a distribution system 7 In the left pane, select Distribution Systems. Note the 3 distribution systems listed. 8 Click Add and in the Electrical settings dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter 120/240. For Phase, select Single. For Wires, select 3. For L-L Voltage, select 240. For L-G Voltage, select 120.

Specify demand factors 9 In the left pane, select Demand Factors. You can specify demand factors that let you adjust the rating of the main service for the building. 10 In the Electrical Settings dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Load Classification, select Power. Under More Than, select 10000 VA. Click Split. Select 20000 VA and for Demand Factor, enter 50. Click OK.

11 Close the file with or without saving it. Next you create a schedule to define required lighting levels. Then you assign lighting levels to spaces.

Specifying Electrical Settings | 159

Defining Required Lighting
In this exercise, you specify the lighting levels that are required for the different spaces within the building, such as offices, restrooms, and conference rooms. You begin by adding a new Project Parameter (Required Lighting Level), then you create a Key Schedule that links your new parameter to the various types of spaces in your project. Key schedules provide an efficient way to create an instance parameter that can be used to map specific parameter values to particular key styles. In this case the key style is the type of space and, because the key is linked to your new project parameter, its value becomes the Required Lighting Level. Later in the tutorial, you will use the new parameter again to compare the value for Required Lighting Level against the actual illumination provided by fixtures that you place in the plan. Training File
■ ■

On the Quick Access toolbar, click

(Open).

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\RME_Elec_Planning_02_i.rvt.

Add a project parameter for lighting 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. 2 In the Project Parameters dialog, click Add. 3 In the Parameter Properties dialog, under Parameter Data:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter Required Lighting Level. For Discipline, select Electrical. For Type of Parameter, select Illuminance. For Group Parameter Under, select Electrical - Lighting. Under Categories, select Spaces. Verify that Instance is selected. Click OK twice. The Required Lighting Level project parameter has been added and will appear as an instance parameter for all spaces, under the Electrical - Lighting group in the space element properties.

Verify the new parameter 4 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click Level 2 - Lighting Plan. 5 In the drawing area, zoom in on the lower left corner and use the crosshair as a guide to select Space 218.

6 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.

160 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System

7 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Electrical - Lighting, note the Required Lighting Level parameter. Click OK. Create a schedule for required lighting levels 8 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 9 In the New Schedule dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Category, select Spaces. For Name, enter Space Lighting Requirements. Select Schedule Keys, and for Key Name, enter Lighting Levels. Click OK.

10 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available Fields, double-click Required Lighting Level, and click OK. The schedule displays and includes a title and column headings. 11 Double-click the column boundary to the right of each column to adjust the column to fit the text.

Add space lighting requirements to the schedule table 12 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New. 13 In the Key Name column of the first row, enter Open Office. 14 In the first row of the Required Lighting Level column, enter 45. 15 Adjust the column boundaries as needed.

16 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New to add 13 more rows. 17 Complete the table by entering the following:

The fc value is automatically applied as the parameter is based upon illuminance parameter type, which is mapped to project units. Notice that as you enter the data, the rows are automatically sorted by Key Name. You can change the sort/grouping to sort by Required Lighting Level.

Defining Required Lighting | 161

Change the sort order of the schedule 18 Right-click in the schedule and click View Properties. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog, for Sorting/Grouping, click Edit. 20 In the Schedule Properties dialog:
■ ■

For Sort By, select Required Lighting Level. Select Blank Line.

21 Click OK twice. The entries in the schedule are sorted by Required Lighting Level.

22 Using the same method, change the sort order back to the default setting. The entries in the schedule are sorted by Key Name. Apply a lighting level to spaces 23 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 - Lighting Plan. 24 Zoom to Space 218 and select the space element.

25 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Note that under Electrical-Lighting, that Required Lighting Level is blank. 26 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Identity Data, for Lighting Levels, select Instruction-Standard. Notice that the Required Lighting Level now has a value of 50 fc and the field is dimmed, since the Lighting Level is set to use the value assigned to the Instruction-Standard key value. The

162 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System

only way to change the value is to either select a different Lighting Level key, select None for Lighting Level and type a specific value, or edit the Required Lighting Level key schedule for the selected key. Since Required Lighting Level is an instance parameter, the value input applies only to the selected space. 27 Click OK. You can apply a key schedule to multiple spaces at the same time by selecting the spaces and specifying the lighting levels in the Electrical properties dialog.

28 Close the file with or without saving it. Next you create a color fill scheme for space lighting.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules
Revit MEP lets you add color fills to spaces based on specific space parameters. Space color fill plans and schedules can be helpful as design tools and as design communications documents. In this exercise, you will create a space color fill plan using the lighting levels that you specified in the previous exercise. Space color fills can be used with any parameter that exists for the space components. Later in this exercise, you create a space lighting analysis schedule to aid in the layout of your lighting design. The schedule includes a calculated lighting delta value, which is the difference between the required and the calculated illuminance values. Training File
■ ■

On the Quick Access toolbar, click

(Open).

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\RME_Elec_Planning_03_i.rvt.

Create a color fill legend scheme 1 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Color Schemes. 2 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog:
■ ■

Under Schemes, for Category, select Spaces. Under Schemes, click (Duplicate).

3 In the New Color Scheme dialog, for Name, enter Required Lighting and click OK. 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog:
■ ■

Under Scheme Definition, for Title, enter Required Lighting Levels. For Color, select Required Lighting Level, and click OK to dismiss the alert message.

5 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog:

Under Scheme Definition, verify the By Range is selected.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 163

Select the scheme for At Least 20.00 fc, and click (Add Value). This command adds a new value based on the split value of the unit you are adding the new value after. For example, if you select the value for 20 fc and click Add, then the new value will be 40 fc. If you select the value for 20 fc again and click Add, then the new value will be 30 fc or half of the difference between the two values you are adding.

With the scheme for At Least 20. 00 fc still selected, click

(Add Value) again.

Select the scheme for At Least 40.00 fc, and click

(Add Value).

■ ■ ■

Select the scheme for 30.00 fc, and click

(Add Value).

Select the scheme for 50.00 fc, enter 75.00, and press ENTER. Select the scheme for 40.00 fc, enter 50.00, and press ENTER.

Click OK.

Add a legend and apply the color scheme 6 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click Level 2 - Lighting CF. 7 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend. 8 In the drawing area, click to place the legend to the right of the drawing. 9 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog:
■ ■ ■

For Space Type, select Spaces. For Color Scheme, select Required Lighting. Click OK.

The color fill plan displays the required illuminance levels based on the key values previously created.

164 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System

Create a space lighting analysis schedule 10 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 11 In the New Schedule dialog:
■ ■

For Category, select Spaces. For Name, enter Space Lighting Analysis and click OK.

12 In the Schedule Properties dialog, for Available Fields, double-click Number, Name, Level, Average Estimated Illumination, and Required Lighting Level. 13 Click Calculated Value. 14 In the Calculated Value dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter Lighting Delta. For Discipline, select Electrical. For Type, select Illuminance. For Formula, click Browse.
■ ■

In the Fields dialog, select Average Estimated Illumination. Click OK.

In the Calculated Value dialog, for Formula, at the end of Average Estimated Illumination, press the spacebar, type a hyphen, and click Browse.
■ ■

In the Fields dialog, select Required Lighting Level. Click OK twice.

15 In the Schedule Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■

On the Sorting/Grouping tab, for Sort by, select Level. Select Header. Select Blank Line. On the Formatting tab, for Fields, select Lighting Delta. Click Conditional Format.

In the Conditional Formatting dialog, under Condition, for Test, select Not Between.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 165

The lighting delta values that are not within the conditional value of -5 fc and 5 fc are highlighted in red. ■ ■ In the Color dialog. Click OK three times. Click Background Color. enter -5 fc and 5 fc. 16 Close the file with or without saving it. 166 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . for Custom Colors. select Red.■ ■ For Value.

167 . using the color fill plan and the space analysis schedule as an aid in lighting placement to satisfy required lighting levels. Create circuits (with and without wire) to create the logical connections between devices and fixtures. Balance wire sizes and breaker service. Then. you modify the color plan to illustrate the space by the Average Estimated Illumination values.Designing an Electrical System 8 In this lesson. power circuits. and switch systems) by establishing logical connections between electrical components. Create a panel schedule. Use the System Browser to check your design. you create electrical systems (including lighting circuits. These values are based on internal lighting level calculations which use the space floor and wall reflectance values and workplane height to automatically calculate average illuminance or lighting levels. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Add devices and fixtures using schedule to satisfy required lighting levels. you place lighting fixtures in the drawing. First. Create power loads. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills In this exercise. as you place lighting fixtures. you verify illuminance values to indicate when the lighting level requirements have been satisfied.

■ ■ ■ 5 Click OK. select the color legend. Notice that the Library has an average estimated illumination less than 20.Lighting Color Fill view is open.00 fc. 168 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. select Orange. click (Open).Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Modify the color fill plan 1 Verify that the Level 2 . for the Spaces Category. Click OK. 3 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. 6 Press ESC to deselect the legend. In the Color dialog. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_01_i. for Basic Colors. then modify the color scheme legend to use the color fill plan as a design tool for many tasks. By using orange as the color for this range. click Training Files. we can quickly identify those areas of the building that do not meet the specified lighting requirements. 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ Under Schemes. You can create additional color schemes. select the color for Less Than 20. select Average Estimated Illumination.00 fc. Under Scheme Definition. 2 In the drawing area.

Add fixtures 14 In the drawing area. and the Lighting Delta as red for values out of the +/. indicating a value greater than 0 fc.Lighting Ceiling plan. The color fill will change colors as lighting fixtures are placed that raise the illumination level above 20 fc.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans and open the Level 2 . The order of the tiled windows is determined by the order in which the windows were activated.277VM_Plain Recessed Lighting Fixture 600x600 . 13 Click the Level 2 . As you add lighting fixtures to the Library. 11 Click the Space Lighting Analysis view to make it active. with the last activated window appearing in the upper-left corner. Note that the lighting delta can be cleared. The colors will coincide with the values in the color fill legend.5 fc range specified in the conditional format of this field. however the color fill plan can display within the range below the specified value because of the +/.5 fc range. All of this works as a visual aid for the designer to insure design requirements are met. expand Schedule/Quantities and open the Space Lighting Analysis view. 17 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face.5 fc range is satisfied. 8 In the Project Browser. The color fill plan also indicates in orange an illumination value below 20 fc. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 169 . As you add lighting fixtures to the Library. 15 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Lighting Fixture. 10 Click the Level 2 Color Fill_Lighting Plan view to make it active.7 In the Project Browser. which is the lowest value in the specified range. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting . The red field will clear once the +/. 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. Windows are arranged in a counter-clockwise order.277. zoom to space Library 219. The schedule indicates the Average Estimated Illumination as yellow for values of 0 fc (conditional format). 9 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. all three of these colored fields will clear to white. 16 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Recessed Parabolic Light: 2’x2’ (2 Lamp) . the illumination values in the color fill plan and schedule analysis will automatically update.Lighting Ceiling Plan view to make it active.

23 Click OK. 25 On the Options Bar. 170 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . NOTE This option must be selected in order for lighting information to be updated in the color fill plan and schedule. 18 Click to place the fixture. verify that the option for Calculate Coefficient of Utilization is selected. so that as the ceiling plan moves vertically. 19 Press ESC to end the command. 21 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. select Multiple. the fixtures will move accordingly.The Place on Face option allows the fixtures to be hosted by the ceiling plan. 22 In the Instance Properties dialog. In the Space Lighting Analysis view. 26 Use the Copy command to place 2 more fixtures as shown. 24 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. the lighting delta and average estimated illumination for space Library 219 are updated. 20 Select the lighting fixture.

27 Press ESC to end the command. 29 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 171 . 28 In the drawing area. 30 On the Options Bar. 31 Click in the drawing area to place 6 additional groups of fixtures as shown.NOTE Object snaps are used for selecting intersections of the ceiling grid. select Multiple. select the 3 fixtures.

Note the value in red for the space Library 219. 33 Click to activate the Schedule window. The values in the Space Lighting Analysis view are updated automatically. Modify multiple fixture instances 34 Select the vertical center group of light fixtures.32 Press ESC. 172 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .

36 In the Filter dialog.35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. select Lighting Fixtures.277V. Click OK. and for Category. click Check None. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 173 . 37 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Recessed Parabolic Light: 2’x4’ (2 Lamp) .

Note the changes for the space Library 219. 174 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .The values in the schedule are updated automatically. 38 Click to activate the Color Fill_Lighting Plan view.

42 In the drawing area. The lighting delta is satisfied.39 Repeat the previous steps to change the same group of fixtures to Recessed Parabolic Light: 2’x4’ (3 Lamp) . 40 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align. select Multiple Alignment. 41 On the Options Bar.277V. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 175 . click the ceiling grid line as shown. Note the changes for the space Library 219.

44 Repeat the previous step to align the remaining fixtures. The fixture aligns.43 Click the left edge of the first fixture. 176 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .

click (Open). Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 177 . Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures In this exercise. 46 Close the file with or without saving it. you modify the light fixture IES files. you modify the IES data of the light fixtures with the goal of maximizing the lighting output using the fewest number of fixtures. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_02_i.45 Press ESC to end the command. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. In the next exercise.rvt.

5 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 . 6 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Click Edit Type. 3 In the Space Lighting Analysis schedule view. zoom to space Library 219 and select the lighting fixture shown. 2 Tile the views as shown.Create a new lighting fixture type 1 In the Project Browser. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting . Expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 . Note the Average Estimated Illumination value of 46 fc.Lighting Plan. 178 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Expand Schedules/Quantities and open Space Lighting Analysis. 4 In the Level 2 Lighting Plan view.Lighting Color Fill plan. scroll to view space space Library 219.

select 463T5_S. Under Photometrics. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 179 . Under Electrical. Under Photometrics. enter . ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Electrical Loads.00 VA. In the Select File dialog. ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Initial Intensity dialog.85. click the value for Initial Intensity.93. ■ Click OK twice. select Xenon and click OK. In the Name dialog. specify 15000. for Apparent Load. Note that in the Space Lighting Analysis Schedule. for Ballast Loss Factor. for Type Mark. select Luminous Flux. Click OK. for Color Preset. click the value for Light Loss Factor. the Lighting Delta for the Library is updated. and click OK. for Name enter 2’x4’ (3 Lamp) T5_HO_54W . ■ ■ ■ In the Light Loss Factor dialog. click the value for Photometric Web File and click Browse. select T5 [HO]. Apply the lighting fixture type 8 Select all the fixtures in the center column in the Library as shown. 7 Press ESC to deselect the fixture. For Luminaire Dirt Depreciation.277V and click OK.00 lm. Under Photometrics. enter . Under Identity Data. enter 162. click the value for Initial Color. ■ Click Apply. ■ In the Initial Color dialog. for Lamp. enter F15.ies and click Open. ■ Under Photometrics.■ In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ Click Duplicate. Note the lighting type has changed to F14.

10 In the Filter dialog. Note that the selected lighting fixtures have been updated. click Check None.9 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 11 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select 2’x4’ (3 Lamp) T5_HO_54W .277V. 12 Press ESC to deselect the fixtures. Click OK. Remove lighting fixtures 13 Select the 3 lighting fixtures in the center column of the Library as shown. and for Category. and that the lighting delta for the Library in the Space Lighting Analysis Schedule also has been updated. select Lighting Fixtures. 180 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .

select the top center fixture. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 181 .Press Delete. 16 Click the other fixtures in the center to apply the fixture type. Apply the fixture type to other fixtures 14 Click Modify tab ➤ Clipboard panel ➤ Match Type. Note the lighting delta updates again. 15 In space Library 219.

Note that the lighting delta for the Library has been updated again. Remove lighting fixtures 18 Select the 2 lighting fixtures as shown. 182 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .17 Click Match Fixtures tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command.

Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar.rvt. In the next exercise. click Training Files. 19 Close the file with or without saving it. Place lighting switches 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. you add switches. The procedure for placing switches and receptacles is the same as for placing any hosted components in Revit MEP. junction boxes. The lighting delta has been updated and is now 0. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_03_i. Placing Switches. Placing Switches. Junction Boxes. and receptacles to your design. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Junction Boxes. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. and Receptacles | 183 . click (Open).Press Delete. 2 In the drawing area. and Receptacles In this exercise you add switches for the lighting switches and the receptacles in your project.

7 Click to place the switch.277V. 6 Position the switch on the interior wall as shown.3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting. 184 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Because the switch requires a wall to serve as the host.Regular Voltage: Passive Infrared . 4 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Wall Occupancy Sensor . it is only previewed when the cursor is over a wall. 5 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Placement tab ➤ Place on Vertical Face.

11 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family. 13 Position the junction box in space Computer Lab 222 as shown. and Receptacles | 185 . Select Junction Boxes . Junction Boxes.8 Place a second switch of the same type on the other side of the wall as shown. 9 Press ESC to end the command. Place junction boxes 10 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture.rfa and click Open. The element type Junction Boxes .NoLoad: 4” Square is selected in the Type Selector. browse to Revit MEP ➤ Imperial Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ Power Devices.NoLoad. 12 In the Load Family dialog. Placing Switches.

186 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . In the Type Properties dialog. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Power . 18 Press ESC to deselect the junction box. enter 9’0”. zoom to space Library 219. 21 In the drawing area. 16 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.Offset. 15 Select the junction box. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. NOTE When entering values. note the Number of Poles is 1. enter JB-1NL. for Level 2 . Place wall-hosted receptacles 19 In the Project Browser. 20 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden to close other views that may be open.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 Power Plan view.14 Press ESC to end the command. 17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Under Constraints. Click OK twice. Click Edit Type. note that Apparent Load is set to 0. for Mark. you can enter a space to separate the unit values. Under Electrical.

22 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. Placing Switches. right-click the a column heading and click View ➤ Systems. right-click and click Column Settings. Expand General. 24 For any column. 23 In the System Browser. Junction Boxes. Select Size. Expand Electrical. Click OK. Distribution System. expand Unassigned and scroll space Library 219. Note that the values for the space Library 219 are currently blank. NOTE If necessary. dock the System Browser at the bottom of your window. and Voltage. Right-click the column heading again and click View ➤ Electrical. Space Number. Space Name. This list displays connectors and circuits that have not been assigned to a panel. Select Load. 26 In the System Browser. and Receptacles | 187 . 25 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Check None. and Number of Elements.

188 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 34 Drag the grip to move the witness line to the receptacle on the left as shown. 35 Select the dimension and enter 12’. 30 Scroll the System Browser to see the added receptacles. 28 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Duplex Receptacle: Standard. 33 Position the cursor on the Move Witness Line grip as shown. 29 Click to place 2 receptacles in space Library 219 as shown. Reposition the receptacle 32 Select the receptacle on the right. 31 Close the System Browser.27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture.

select Copy and Multiple.The receptacle on the right is repositioned according to the dimension you enter. and Receptacles | 189 . 36 Press ESC to deselect the receptacle. Place additional receptacles 37 Repeat the previous steps to place a third receptacle in space Library 219 as shown. 40 On the Options Bar. Placing Switches. Junction Boxes. 39 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 38 Select the receptacle.

42 Move the cursor down.41 Click the midpoint of the receptacle. and enter 12’ and press ENTER. enter 12’ and press ENTER to place another receptacle. move the cursor along the wall. 190 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .

Junction Boxes.43 Press ESC to end the command. and Receptacles | 191 . Placing Switches.

45 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select Duplex Receptacle: Standard. 192 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 47 Click to place 3 floor receptacles as shown.Place floor-hosted receptacles 44 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. 46 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face.

you need to create logical connections to define the topology. Next you create lighting circuits and show wire. Although the connections between this type of equipment are not typically shown on plans.48 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire In this exercise you add the electrical equipment for the distribution systems in your plan. The following diagram shows the connectivity for your electrical Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 193 .

3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Electrical Equipment. Add panelboards 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_04_i. 194 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 2 In the drawing area. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. then create lighting circuitry and add wiring as the circuits are created. click (Open). You start at the low voltage panels (L-1 and L-2). click Training Files. and work toward the higher voltage. In the left pane of the Open dialog. In this exercise you also become more familiar with the wiring settings. zoom to the space Electrical 220. Adding wiring to a project is optional.equipment. main distribution panels (H-2 and MDP).rvt.

Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 195 . #1 Pole Breakers.Loads. 8 Select the panelboard. 6 Click to place the panelboard as shown. enter 20. 15 On the Options Bar. 11 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Electrical . 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 7 Press ESC to end the command. for Distribution System. 12 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard. 10 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.Surface: 100A panelboard as shown. for Max. 9 On the Options Bar. 13 Repeat the previous steps to place a 480V MCB Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . 5 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Placement Panel ➤ Place on Vertical Face. enter PP-2B. for Distribution System. 14 Select the panelboard.Surface: 100A. Click OK. select 120/208 Wye. For Panel Name. select 480/277 Wye.4 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select 208V MCB Lighting and Appliance Panelboard .

enter 20. 20 In the drawing area. 22 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. For Panel Name. Add a circuit with wire 19 In the Project Browser. for Max. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 Lighting Plan view. select Lighting Devices and Lighting Fixtures. 24 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. #1 Pole Breakers. click Check None. Click OK. ■ 18 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard. 21 Select all fixtures and switches in the space. Click OK. which is the logical connection between the elements. enter LP-2B.17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical . 23 In the Filter dialog. The blue sketch graphics show the created circuit. zoom to space Instruction 221. 196 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . and for Category. Note that Apparent Load Phases are dimmed because they are calculated values.Loads.

Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 197 . The red sketch graphics show the logical circuit with the home run pointing toward the selected panel. 26 Select lighting panel LP-2B. 27 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc.25 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel.

Add a switch 29 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting. 33 Select the switch on the right.28 Press ESC to end the command. 31 Click to place the switch in the drawing area as shown. 30 Click Lighting Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select Lighting Switches: Three Way. 198 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 32 Press ESC.

34 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel and select Lighting Switches: Three Way from the Type Selector drop-down. 35 Select the left three-way switch. 36 Click the top-left lighting fixture to add to the circuit. right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 199 .

Note that the tick marks are updated to show 4. select Wires. 39 Select all items in space Instruction 221.Loads. 40 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. and for Category. 44 Close the file with or without saving it. 200 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 43 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical . 42 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Next you create circuits without showing wire.37 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. for Hot Conductors. click Check None. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire This exercise is similar to the previous exercise in that you create circuits. Training File ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Click OK. 38 Press ESC to end the command. 41 In the Filter dialog. except without wire. Click OK. enter 2. click (Open).

click Training Files. 5 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 15 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ Expand General and review the settings. and Voltage Drop are selected. 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space. 10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. Add a circuit without wire 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 201 . 9 Select panel LP-2B in space Electrical 220. 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right and the lighting sensor.rvt. 14 Right-click on the Systems heading and click Column Settings. expand Power. 8 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Select Panel. 13 In the System Browser. Distribution System. Click OK. and verify that Load. right-click on the Systems heading. 2 In the drawing area. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_05_i. Rating. and click View ➤ Systems and Electrical. ■ 16 In the System Browser. 12 Move the System Browser pane to the bottom of the screen for easier viewing. Check circuits 11 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. 6 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit. Expand Electrical. and then expand circuit 1. 4 Right-click the connector and click Create Power Circuit. Voltage.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. 17 Scroll down and expand LP-2B.

202 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 25 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located. 18 Expand circuit 2 and note the devices. 26 Select the 4 remaining lighting fixtures and the other occupancy sensor in space Computer Lab 222. right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. change the Voltage to 277V. under Electrical. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to a panel. 23 Move the cursor over one of the adjacent fixtures and click to select it. View circuit information 24 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. Add additional devices to the circuit 19 In the drawing area. 29 Move the cursor over one of the fixtures and press TAB 3 times to view the circuit. 28 Select one of the occupancy sensors. 20 Select the junction box and click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 30 Close the System Browser. Click OK. 27 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. Note the addition of the junction box to circuit 2 in the System Browser.Note the circuit in space Instruction 221. 22 With the junction box still selected.

Add tags to fixtures 31 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 35 Press ESC to end the command. Edit tags 42 Select a tag and click Modify Lighting Fixture Tags tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family. select Lighting Fixture Tag: Standard. note the label parameters and click Cancel. 43 Select the label name and click Modify Label tab ➤ Label panel ➤ Edit Label. click Edit Type. for Type Mark. Click Yes. Notice that all 6 lighting fixture tags are updated. 44 In the Edit Label dialog. 40 Click OK twice. 36 Select the upper-left fixture. 33 In the Tags dialog: ■ ■ For Lighting Fixtures. 37 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 45 Click Modify Label tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar. 47 In the drawing area. 38 In the Instance Properties dialog. 32 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Deselect Leader. Click Tags. 34 Click each of the 6 lighting fixtures in space Computer Lab 222. click below the first one to place it. Click OK. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 203 . 46 Click Place Label tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal ➤ Center and Vertical ➤ Top. 41 Press ESC to deselect the fixture. 39 In the Type Properties dialog. enter FR4. under Identity Data.

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Wrap between parameters only. and click Apply. Note the tags are updated in the drawing area. click Check None. select Circuit Number and Switch ID and click Add parameter(s) to label . 59 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. Creating a Switch System In this exercise you learn how to create a switch system. Click Apply and note the label parameters are divided into 2 lines in the drawing area. and for Category. 50 Drag the handle on the right side of the tag to resize it by dragging it to the left. 55 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 204 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .rfa. 60 Zoom out to see the tagged fixtures. Click Save. For Circuit Number. 61 Close the file with or without saving it. enter a comma. enter Lighting Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag. 58 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All. 51 Click ➤ Save As ➤ Family.48 In the Edit Label dialog: ■ Under Category Parameters. Click OK. select Lighting Fixture Tags. for File Name. Add tags to remaining fixtures 54 Select all the elements in space Computer Lab 222. 56 In the Filter dialog. Click OK. Note the tag is updated in the drawing area. 49 Click Place Label tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. 52 In the Save As dialog. select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard and click Apply. Next you create a switch system. 53 Click Create tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project. Click OK. 57 Click Modify Lighting Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ and select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard. Deselect Break and for Suffix. select Break.

3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space. Create a switch system 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_06_i. 4 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch. for Switch ID. click (Open). 2 In the drawing area. Note that the lighting fixture tags for the two fixtures are updated with the Switch ID. Creating a Switch System | 205 . 11 Highlight the fixture and press TAB 4 times to see the switch system. In the left pane of the Open dialog. enter a. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. click Training Files. under Electrical Lighting. 10 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System.Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 5 Click Modify Switch System tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System. 13 Click Modify Lighting Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Click OK. 9 Select the occupancy sensor. 6 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System. 12 Select the occupancy sensor.rvt. 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right of the space. 8 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog.

21 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch. 23 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Switch Properties.15 Press ESC to deselect the occupancy sensor. Note the lighting fixture tags for the 4 fixtures below the wall are updated with the switch ID. 19 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System. enter b. under Electrical .Lighting. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. for switch ID. Click OK. 17 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch. 20 Select the remaining 3 lighting fixtures. 18 Click Modify Switch Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System. 22 Select the occupancy sensor on the bottom side of the wall. 25 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System. 206 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 16 Select one of the lighting fixtures below the wall.

select the PP-2B panel. Creating Power Loads | 207 . 4 In the Filter dialog. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_07_i. Circuits are used for power. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. The concept of grouping similar functions into systems is used to show logical connections between different components in the system. click (Open).rvt. click Training Files. zoom to space Instruction 221 and draw a pick box to select all the components in the space. and for Category. lighting. 6 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. 2 In the drawing area. Add a circuit 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open. Click OK. click Check None.26 Close the file with or without saving it. select Electrical Fixtures. Next you create a circuit and size wire. 5 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. and data systems. Creating Power Loads In this exercise you will learn methods for creating power circuits (circuit groups). 3 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 7 In space Electrical 220.

and in the drawing area. and click Element Properties. 12 Press ESC to deselect the wire. Click OK. select Hook Wire Tick Mark. and in the right pane. click the minus symbol to delete a tick mark. select Long Wire Tick Mark. under Electrical . 10 Right-click the wire for the home run to the panel. and click Open. for Ground Wire Tick Mark. 15 In the Load Family dialog. 17 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. for Hot Conductors.8 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. select Hook Wire Tick Mark.rfa. 9 Press ESC to deselect the wires. 208 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . navigate to Imperial Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks.Loads. Notice the 3 tick marks is changed to 4 tickmarks. 11 In the Instance Properties dialog. 19 Click OK. enter 2. select Wiring. 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. 14 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family. 13 Select the wire again. 18 For Neutral Wire Tick Mark.

24 Press ESC to deselect the wires. and click to select the circuit. 25 Select the homerun from space Computer Lab 222 and the wire between the first and second receptacle in space Instruction 221. press Tab to display a preview of the circuit wiring. as shown. 21 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. Creating Power Loads | 209 .The tick mark for all ground conductors are changed to a hooked tick marks and neutral conductors display as a long tick mark. Combine multiple homeruns into a multi-circuit homerun 20 Highlight one of the receptacles in space Computer Lab 222. select the PP-2B panel. 22 In space Electrical 220. 23 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc.

and the connector on the nearest receptacle in space Computer Lab 222. click a point halfway between the first and second receptacle to create an arc. 28 In the drawing area. and then click the connector of the second receptacle as shown. in space Instruction 221. Notice that there are now 4 tick marks on the homerun and the wiring for space Instruction 221 and a double arrowhead to indicate the multi-circuit homeruns. 27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Wire drop-down ➤ Arc. as shown. 29 In space Instruction 221. add another wire between the connector on the last receptacle in 221. There are only 3 tick marks 210 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . click the connector of the first receptacle.26 Press Delete.

rvt. Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service In this exercise you begin by balancing the loads at the Level 1 and Level 2 panels.on the wiring that extends to the space Computer Lab 222. Circuit loads should be balanced to present as nearly as possible an equal load to each phase. Balance circuit loads 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open. 31 Close the file with or without saving it. Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service | 211 . then you examine the loads presented at the panels to set your final breaker sizes. select panel LP-2B. Balancing loads begins with adjusting the loads at the panels farthest from the power source. This will reduce neutral current as well as prevent an excess voltage drop due to one phase being overloaded. zoom to space Electrical 220. you verify and adjust wire sizes that Revit MEP recommends for handling the loads on those circuits. An additional hot conductor is added to the 221 wiring. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_08_i. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Finally. and connect its wiring to a receptacle in space Instruction 221. Next you balance the loads for your design. click Training Files. Notice the triple arrowhead for the homerun. 30 Add wiring to space Electrical 220. click Open. 2 In the drawing area. 3 In the Electrical space.

for Rating. Phase B 3636 VA. Notice that the loads on Phase A. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit: ■ ■ Scroll down and note the current value for the Wire Size parameter is 3-#12.3712 VA. A warning indicates that the power system is empty and will be deleted. 12 Select panel PP-2B. 1-#10. enter 30A. and Phase C provides 2028 VA. 212 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 13 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 5 In the Edit Circuits dialog. ■ ■ Adjust circuit breaker sizes 9 Select panel PP-2B. Under Electrical-Loads. The loads are now more evenly distributed over the three phases (Phase A . B. 1-#12. click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Circuit Properties. while Phase B provides 2004 VA. and Phase C . 6 Click OK. 1-#12. 11 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Remove from Circuit. 1-#10. 10 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 14 Close the warning dialog. click Rebalance Loads. and C shows an imbalance with the heaviest load 6932 VA on Phase A.3616 VA). Click OK. Scroll down. Verify and adjust wire sizes 7 With panel LP-2B still selected.4 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Circuits. Revit MEP automatically calculates wire sizes based on circuit rating. and note the value for the Wire Size parameter is now 3-#10.

click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 25 Press ESC to deselect the panel. under Electrical . click Training Files. enter 30A. A warning indicates that the total connected load exceeds 80% of the defined value of 20A for the circuit you are creating. 17 Close the warning dialog. Creating a Panel Schedule | 213 . you create a panel schedule report for panelboard MDP-1. click (Open).Loads. 21 With panel PP-2B still selected. under Electrical . Select PP-2B. for Rating. 24 Select the transformer TP-2B. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit. 18 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. Panel PP-2B is now reconnected to transformer TP-2B. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. 23 With panel PP-2B still selected. In the left pane of the Open dialog. The circuit breaker size for panel PP-2B is now sized to handle the connected load. enter 25A. Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. for Rating. and click OK. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_09_i. 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. The Panel Schedule Report appears in a new window. 22 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit. 3 In the Select Panels dialog: ■ ■ ■ Click Clear Selection.Loads. Click OK. Creating a Panel Schedule In this exercise.rvt.15 Select panel PP-2B. 20 Click OK to close the warning dialog. Next you create a panel schedule. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports and Schedules panel ➤ Panel Schedule. Create the panel schedule report 1 Verify that the Level 1 Power Plan is open. and click OK.

the panel will not appear in the Select Panels dialog. 214 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 8 Click Modify Schedule Graphics tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Under Body Text. 10 In the Panel Report Appearance dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Header Text. for Appearance. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog. Checking Your Design In this exercise you learn how to use the System Browser to examine the circuitry that you created in previous exercises. click Edit.NOTE If a panel schedule has already been created for a panel. 5 In the Project Browser. Under Header Text. select Berlin Sans FB. click Training Files. expand Sheets (all). 11 Click OK twice. 7 Select the schedule. and open E601 . select Bold and Italic. under Reports ➤ Panel Schedule. Under Header Text.Panel Schedules. 6 In the Project Browser. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_10_i. 4 Close the report. click (Open). drag PP-2B onto the sheet. enter 1/8. for Font.rvt. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. In the left pane of the Open dialog. under Other. The Panel Report Appearance dialog displays. enter 3/32. for Font Size. This dialog allows you to control how the panel schedule report displays when it is included on a sheet. 12 Close the file with or without saving it. for Font Size. You also learn to use the Check Circuits tool to verify that all of the circuits in your plan are connected. Next you use the System Browser to check your design.

each with a load of 180VA. select space Lounge 212. 6 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the bottom wall and press TAB once. Expand Unassigned. 11 Select the receptacle on the right side wall. Check circuits 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Circuits. In the System Browser. Note the receptacle in space Lounge 212. Checking Your Design | 215 . In the System Browser. and then click the receptacle to select the circuit. 10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add to Circuit. notice that PP-2C for circuit 2 is updated. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located. note that the receptacle is not connected to any circuit. and click AutoFit All Columns to resize the columns in the System Browser. 9 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 7 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the right side wall and press TAB once. Expand Power ➤ PP-2C ➤ circuit 2. 12 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 4 In the System Browser: ■ Right-click a column heading.View unassigned components 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open. There are 4 devices connected to circuit 2. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 8 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the bottom wall. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to panel PP-2C. press TAB once. Notice that the receptacle on the right side wall is not connected to circuit 2. ■ ■ 5 In the drawing area. 3 Move the System Browser to the bottom of the drawing area.

18 Select panel LP-2C. Notice that panel LP-2C is not connected. 19 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Systems Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. select MDP-1. Panel LP-2C is now connected to the main distribution panel MDP-1. 17 In the drawing area.14 In the warning window that is displayed indicating an unconnected power connector. 15 In the dialog. 20 On the Options Bar. 16 Close the details dialog. 216 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 23 Close the file with or without saving it. click (Expand warning dialog) to view details of the warning. under Warnings. for Panel. expand the warning category for Circuit is not assigned to a panel ➤ Warning 2. 22 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. zoom to space Electrical 214. 21 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit.

you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a plumbing system. 217 .Creating a Plumbing System In this tutorial.

218 .

4 In the Name dialog. click Training Files. In this exercise. planning is critical to a successful design. 3 In the Type Properties dialog. and specify the default fittings that will be used with this type. and click OK. right-click PVC .Design ➤ Floor Plans. In the left pane of the Open dialog. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types.rvt. 2 In the Project Browser. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .Vent. You load the families of components that are required for your plumbing systems.Planning a Plumbing System 9 Creating plumbing systems in Revit MEP is similar to any design project. Loading pipe fittings required by the plumbing system. Adding a pipe size. and verify that Level 1 . type PVC . Specifying default sanitary piping settings for the main and branch piping. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing\RME_Plumb_Planning_01_i. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. and click Properties. Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser.Design is open. Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System Revit MEP provides families of common plumbing components that you place in your plumbing plan. you prepare to design the plumbing system by: ■ ■ ■ ■ Creating a PVC Sanitary Pipe type. 219 . you create a PVC pipe type. in addition to loading existing families. click Duplicate.Sanitary. In this lesson.Plumbing Plan .

select None. PVC . for: ■ ■ ■ ■ Preferred Junction Type. Tap.PVC . 9 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. 22 Click New Size.Sch 40 . select Pipe Types: PVC Sanitary. select Sanitary. 10 On the Selection panel. verify that Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing are selected. for Nominal.0''. 6 Click OK.Vent is listed. 14 Expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. click Modify. and click OK. In the Project Browser. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. Specify sanitary piping settings 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ .Sch 40 . for Pipe Connector Tolerance. select Tee Reducing Double Vent . select Sanitary. 15 For System Type.5 In the Type Properties dialog.DWV: Standard. 8 Click Place Pipe Fitting tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family. enter 1/2''. under Pipe Types. DWV represents Domestic Waste Vent. 16 Specify settings for the Main sanitary piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. 17 In the left pane. Add a pipe size 20 In the left pane. and open Imperial\Families\Trap P . select Tee. 25 For Outside. enter -4' . select Pipe Settings ➤ Sizes. Load piping component families 7 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. enter 5/8''. refer to Revit MEP Online Help.Sch 40 .DWV: Standard. Cross.PVC . 26 Click OK.DWV. click Pipe Settings.rfa. NOTE For additional information on the Mechanical Settings. The new pipe type is listed in the Project Browser under Families ➤ Pipe Fittings. 28 Close the file with or without saving it. 220 | Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System . click Training Files. select Tee Vent . 23 In the Add Pipe Size dialog. For Offset. 18 For System Type. enter 27/32''. Tee. 27 For the new pipe size. 21 In the right pane. and click Main. under Mechanical. 24 For Inside Diameter. 12 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. select Plastic.PVC . 19 Specify the same settings for the Branch sanitary piping as you used for the Main. select Branch. 13 In the right panel. enter 10°. for Material.

and add piping to physically connect the fixtures to the system. including plumbing fixtures. Add a sanitary and vent stack to the system.Designing a Plumbing System 10 In this lesson. Create the hot water system. 221 . Create the sanitary plumbing system. vent. sanitary piping. and hot and cold water piping. Create the cold water system. add a hot water heater. and create piping to physically connect the sinks to the hot water system. Create piping to connect sinks to the sanitary system. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place sanitary plumbing fixtures. you design the plumbing system for the Level 1 men’s room in a commercial building.

Place wall-mounted toilets 1 In the Project Browser. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_01_i.Design ➤ Floor Plans.Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures In this exercise. 1 urinal. 222 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .rvt. move the cursor over a space and refer to the tooltip or the Status Bar for information. and a floor drain to the level 1 men’s room. 2 Zoom in to the bottom middle area of the floor plan. click Training Files. and verify that Level 1 . including the men’s room (space Male 107).Plumbing Plan . In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. You place 3 sinks in a later exercise. you add 2 toilets. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . NOTE To identify a space name and number.Design is open. as shown.

Wall Mounted. 5 On the Placement panel. centered on the bottom horizontal reference line. verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected. under Water Closet . select Public .6 gpf. and 3 sinks.The men's room is partitioned for 2 toilet stalls. Reference lines are included in the plan view to make it easier to place components. in the Type Selector.1. 1 wall-mounted urinal.Flush Valve . against the left wall. Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 223 . as shown. 4 On the Element panel. 6 Click to place a toilet in the accessible toilet space. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture.

above the first in the standard toilet space. Place a wall-mounted urinal 9 In the Type Selector. (Again. and press Esc. NOTE If it is difficult to align the urinal to the reference line. under Urinal . use the reference line to center the fixture.) 8 Press Esc. 224 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . select 3/4'' Flush Valve.Wall Hung.7 Click to place another toilet. zoom in closer. 10 Click to place the urinal in the space above the 2 toilet spaces.

under Floor Drain . you select the floor as the face because this is a floor mounted drain. 13 Click to place the drain above and to the right of the accessible toilet (at approximately 6'' and 6'' from the intersection of the reference lines for the 2 toilet areas). In placing the fixture. 14 Click Modify.Rectangular. Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 225 .Place a floor drain 11 In the Type Selector. 12 On the Placement panel. click Place on Face.2'' Drain. select 5''x5'' Strainer .

The default systems contain the fixtures that you placed. 21 Close the file with or without saving it. 17 If all disciplines are displayed. and review the components listed under this system.rvt. a urinal. you create a sanitary system consisting of the toilets.Open the System Browser 15 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. click Training Files. and dock it by dragging it to the bottom of the drawing area. The fixtures are included in the default system based on the connectors included with the components (sanitary connectors and cold water connectors). Creating a Sanitary System This is the first of 3 exercises that guide you through creating the piping for the men’s room sanitary plumbing system. 20 Expand the Default Domestic Cold Water folder. In this exercise. 16 Click the title bar for the browser. right-click in the System Browser table heading. and notice that there are 2 default systems: Default Sanitary. and Default Domestic Cold Water. and click View ➤ Piping. In the left pane of the Open dialog. You then use Revit MEP’s Layout Path tools to create sloped piping to connect the fixtures to a sanitary outlet. 18 Expand the Unassigned folder. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_02_i. 19 Expand Default Sanitary. 226 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. and a floor drain. and notice that the drain is not included because it does not have a cold water connector.

3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . clear Lines (<Overhead>).Create the sanitary plumbing system 1 In the Project Browser.Design ➤ Floor Plans. Only plumbing fixtures are selected. 5 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen. Creating a Sanitary System | 227 .Plumbing Plan . 6 In the plan view. starting in the lower left and moving to the upper right corner. and verify that Level 1 . verify that Plumbing Fixtures is selected. 7 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . 4 Zoom in to the plumbing fixtures in both views. 8 In the Filter dialog.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing. draw a selection box around the fixtures in the men's room. and click OK.Design is open. 2 In the Project Browser.

for System Name. You include the bathroom space number in the name. 11 On the Options Bar. All of the fixtures except for the drain also have cold water connectors. so the Create Sanitary System is available. The components that were listed under the default system are now included in the Sanitary 107 system. 13 In the Systems Browser. The fixtures you selected all have sanitary connectors. 12 On the Edit System panel. 10 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. If you deselected the drain. and the empty default sanitary folder is deleted. the Create Cold Water System option would also be available.9 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Sanitary. click Finish Editing System. expand Sanitary. 228 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and notice that Sanitary 107 is listed. enter Sanitary 107.

Creating a Sanitary System | 229 . 17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Place Base. at the midpoint of the detail lines. The base is placed.Create physical connections 14 In the plan view. as shown. The base creates a vertical pipe for the system to connect into and establishes a source or an outlet for flow. A preview of the piping layout displays. and click OK. 16 In the Select a System dialog. a toilet. for example. 15 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. select one of the components in the system. 18 Click to select a point to the left of the accessible toilet. select Sanitary 107.

27 Click Modify. for Slope. The elevation of the base with relation to the other components in the system is critical. select Intersections. enter 1/8'' / 12''. enter -4'-0”.19 On the Options Bar. 23 For Offset. and click Settings. 24 In the left pane. click Solutions. select 4''. 26 On the Options Bar. 22 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. You override the default pipe settings before applying the recommended pipe layout. click (Next Solution) until Solution Type 2 of 7 is selected. You accept this suggested solution. it is helpful to be able to change the defaults as you work. 25 On the Options Bar. 20 On the Generate Layout panel. The elevation is specified low enough to allow sloping of the sanitary piping in the system. for Solution Type. for Diameter. for Offset. 230 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . The positive value slopes the pipe down toward the base point. 21 On Options Bar. and click OK. and modify it to meet project requirements. select Main. The default settings are automatically modified. enter -1' 0''. and for Offset. enter -1' 0''. When laying out a number of different systems with different offset requirements. select Branch.

Creating a Sanitary System | 231 . and move the cursor to the left to align all 4 segments to the base point. 29 Click the move parallel control (4-way arrow). select the vertical route path segments.Customize the suggested layout 28 While pressing Ctrl.

as shown. and drag the line to the left to snap perpendicular to the main. 232 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . use the ViewCube to orient the view.30 In the 3D view. 32 Select the vertical branch line for one of the toilets. as shown. 31 Click Modify.

Creating a Sanitary System | 233 . 34 On the Generate Layout panel.33 Using the previous method. adjust the vertical branch line for the other toilet. click Finish Layout.

and examine the sanitary tee to verify proper orientation. select the fitting and click to reorient it. and press Tab 4 times to check connectivity. 234 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . ■ ■ ■ ■ 1=Branch in a network 2=Branch in a network including the branch objects 3=Branch in a network up to a piece of equipment 4=Network (including fixtures) 36 Click to select the fitting to the drain. When a fitting is reversed.Examine the piping Complete all steps in this section in the 3D Plumbing view. 35 Highlight one of the plumbing fixtures.

Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System In this exercise.37 Select the pipe segment to the right of the fitting. The slope control for every segment should indicate the slope is toward the sanitary outlet. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 235 . and check the slope control. adding sinks in the men’s room. you continue with the work from the last exercise. as shown. and manually creating the piping that connects them to the sanitary system. 38 Close the file with or without saving it.

rvt. 4 On the Element panel. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 236 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 2 Zoom in to the men’s room (Space Male 107). and verify that Level 1 .Design is open. Add sinks to the layout 1 In the Project Browser.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .Plumbing Plan . as shown. select 22''x22'' . 5 On the Placement panel. under Lavatory .Rectangular. verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected.Public. in the Type Selector. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture. 6 Click to place the sink centered on the top horizontal reference line.Design ➤ Floor Plans. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_03_i.

in this step you can enter 2 4 (two space four) to specify 2' 4''. enter 2' 4''. ■ Move the cursor up above the top reference line. without having to enter ' and '' symbols. 8 Select the sink. select Multiple. TIP When entering dimensions. Click the right endpoint of the placement reference line for the sink to establish a start point.7 Click Modify. you can enter a space to separate the value for feet and inches. On the Options Bar. For example. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 237 . 9 Make 2 copies of the sink: ■ ■ ■ Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. and press Enter to create a second sink.

11 In the System Browser. expand Sanitary ➤ Sanitary 107. 16 On the Edit System panel. Press Esc. 14 On the Edit Piping System panel. 15 Click the 3 sinks. 13 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System.■ ■ Enter 2' 4''. click Finish Editing System. 12 In the drawing area. select a component of the Sanitary 107 system. and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen. 238 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . Add sinks to the sanitary system 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. and press Enter to create the third sink. click Add To System.

double-click 3D Plumbing.In the System Browser. use the ViewCube to orient the view. 18 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. and click the + control on the left to upgrade the fitting to a tee. Create piping to connect the sinks 17 In the Project Browser. and zoom in to the elbow fitting for the urinal. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 239 . with the tee fitting selected. and click Draw Pipe. as shown. notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) have been added to the Sanitary 107 system. 19 In the 3D view. 20 Select the fitting. right-click the top connector (sanitary connector). 21 Select the tee.Design ➤ 3D Views. under Design ➤ Plumbing . 22 In the plan view.

enter 1/8'' / 12''. 26 On the Options Bar. When you press the Spacebar. for Offset. piping connected to the sanitary system displays in olive green. 24 On the Options Bar. enter 2' . 27 Click Modify. the pipe being drawn automatically assumes the size and elevation of the fitting. NOTE Piping is displayed according to color filters specified in the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. for Slope. press Spacebar. and click Apply.23 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch off this option. 25 Move the cursor up to the centerline of the middle sink. and click to draw the pipe. 240 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . In this example.6''.

move the cursor over the stub pipe.Sch 40 .DWV.3D view shown for clarity 28 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 241 . 30 In the 3D view. click to place the fitting. and when the vertical center line displays. under Wye 45 Deg Double . 29 In the Type Selector. and click the lower rotate control to align the fitting parallel to the sinks. select Standard.PVC . 31 Click Modify. 32 Select the double wye fitting.

zoom in to the double wye fitting. right-click the right connector. 34 Press Esc. on the Options Bar. 36 In the section view. for Offset. enter 6''. and press Enter.33 With the fitting selected. enter 1'. and click Draw Pipe. double-click the section head to open the section view. 39 Draw the pipe as shown: ■ Draw at a 45 degree angle up and to the right. and press Enter. 37 Select the fitting. 242 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . In the next steps. Add pipe stubs to the double wye 35 In the plan view. you add pipe segments to the double wye. 38 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch on this option.

■ Move the cursor horizontally to the right until the end of the pipe segment intersects with the centerline of the right sink. and click to place the pipe. 42 Click Modify. 43 Select the center vertical pipe in the double wye fitting. as shown. 40 Click Modify. which automatically sets the length of the pipe to the value entered. 41 Using the same method.Entering a length dimension while drawing pipes activates Revit MEP’s listening dimension tool. draw similar piping for the left sink (the first segment angled at 135°). Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 243 .

44 Drag the upper control until the pipe aligns with the centerline of the horizontal piping. and press Esc. right-click the bottom connector. 46 In the section view. Add P-Trap Fittings 45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile so you can see all 3 views. 244 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and click Draw Pipe. 48 Click Modify. 47 Move the cursor down. and press Enter to create the segment of pipe. draw a selection box around the left sink to select it. 49 Using the same method. enter 6''. press Spacebar. draw a 6'' pipe for the other 2 sinks.

rotate the P-Trap for the other 2 sinks. and click the rotate control 3 times to orient the pipe toward the double wye piping. You can see in the 3D view that it is connected.Sch 40 .PVC . click to place the P-Trap at the endpoint of the stub pipe for the top sink. 54 Click Modify. select Standard. 51 In the Type Selector. 52 In the plan view. select the P-Trap on the left. You adjust the orientation after placing all 3 P-Traps. 56 Using the same method. 53 Using the same method. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 245 .DWV. under Trap P .50 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. 55 In the 3D view. place a P-Trap on the other 2 sinks.

57 Finish the connection for the left sink: ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view. Move the cursor to the left. 59 Connect the middle sink using a routing solution: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view. 246 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . In the plan view. enter 6''. Select the double wye pipe on the left. Click in the plan view. The piping is connected and the appropriate fittings are automatically created.. 58 Using the same method. connect the right sink to the double wye. click to select the P-Trap for the middle sink. select the left P-Trap. and click Draw Pipe. Click Modify. right-click the left connector on the P-Trap. Click Modify Pipe Fittings tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. and press Enter.

under Pipe Types. Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Routing Solutions. and select the vertical section of pipe from the wye. click Finish to select the recommended solution. while pressing Ctrl. select the section of pipe you just drew.■ In the 3D view. On the Routing Solutions panel. select the 3 horizontal pipes from the sinks. Press Esc. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 247 . ■ ■ ■ ■ Specify a slope 60 In the 3D view. while pressing Ctrl. as shown. and select a proposed solution. select PVC Sanitary. In the Type Selector. Routing Solutions tools are activated that let you add control points or remove control points.

and verify the slope. for Slope. 65 Close the file with or without saving it. 64 Select a pipe that you just modified.61 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Slope. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. verify that 1/8'' / 12'' is selected. Refining the Sanitary Stack In this exercise. adjusting the sanitary stack. You have appropriately sloped the pipe. 248 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . click Training Files.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_04_i. 62 On the Options Bar. click Finish. you continue with the work on the sanitary system. 63 On the Slope Editor panel.

and adjust the views as necessary to view the plumbing.Add a vertical soil stack 1 In the Project Browser.Overall. 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing.Sch 40 . 3 In the Section view. 2 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.Plumbing Plan . Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 38. under Wye Combination with 8th Bend . as shown. Add a reducing wye to the stack 8 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. 9 In the Type Selector. 6 Move the cursor up to the 02 . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . 10 In the 3D view. select Standard. Refining the Sanitary Stack | 249 .Floor level line. 5 Select the tee. and open the following views: ■ ■ ■ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 .DWV. 4 Click the top + control to upgrade the fitting to a tee. right-click the top connector.Design.Design. and click Draw Pipe. select the vertical stack. and click to draw the pipe. select the elbow fitting on the right. 7 On the Selection panel.PVC . and click the intersection to place the fitting. click Modify.

DWV. 13 Click the rotate control once. for Offset. 17 In the Type Selector. and click the rotate control to change the orientation. 14 On the Options Bar.Sch 40 . 12 Select the fitting. 18 In the plan view. select Standard.PVC . under Plug . enter 1'-0”. click the midpoint at the end of the sanitary pipe.11 Click Modify. as shown. 250 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 15 Press Esc. Add a pipe plug to cap the cleanout 16 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting.

The plug is added to the end to cap off the cleanout. Creating the Cold Water System | 251 .Design is open.Design ➤ Floor Plans. you create the domestic cold water system and add piping to connect all of the fixtures in the men’s room to the system. Creating the Cold Water System In this exercise.19 Click Modify. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .Plumbing Plan . click Training Files. 20 Close the file with or without saving it. A cleanout is required on all vertical stacks.rvt. and verify that Level 1 . Specify mechanical settings for the hot and cold water systems 1 In the Project Browser. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_05_i. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

draw a selection box to select the toilets. double-click 3D Plumbing . For Offset. 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. and click Main. you specify different offset elevations for the cold water piping and the hot water piping.Overall. 14 In the System Browser. 9 In the left pane. select Domestic Hot Water. minimize the Sanitary system. and position the browser at the bottom of the screen. select Pipe Types: Water. Create the cold water system 11 In the Project Browser. select Domestic Hot Water. and for System Type. if necessary. select Plumbing Fixtures. for System Type. These categories include all of the components placed earlier that have relevant connectors. and notice that Default Domestic Hot Water and Default Domestic Cold Water systems are listed. verify that the value is 9' 0''. 3 In the left pane of the Mechanical settings dialog. (Do not select the floor drain because it does not have a hot or cold water connector. For Offset. urinal. 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. select Branch. 252 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 15 In the plan view. 8 Specify options for the Main cold water piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type.) 10 Click OK. and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Hot Water system. 17 In the Filter dialog. and sinks. under Design ➤ Plumbing . expand Unassigned. and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Cold Water system. click Check None. for System Type. 7 In the left pane. To minimize opportunities for piping interference. (Remember to specify Domestic Cold Water as the System Type.2 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ .Design ➤ 3D Views. 6 In the left pane. select Branch. select Domestic Cold Water. select Pipe Types: Water. and click OK. select Main. enter 9' 3''. 4 In the right pane.) 16 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 5 Specify options for the Main hot water piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type.

Creating the Cold Water System | 253 . indicating that it is now part of the cold water system. In the System Browser. notice that the Default Domestic Cold water system is removed because all of the fixtures have been added to the DCW 107 system. enter DCW 107. 21 On the Edit System panel. Notice that the water main displays in blue. Expand Domestic Cold Water ➤ DCW 107 to verify the components. 20 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For System Name. verify that Predominantly Flush Valves is selected. 24 Click the horizontal water main above the toilets. 23 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 19 On the System Tools panel. select the toilet closest to the vertical soil stack. click Finish Editing System.18 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Cold Water. For Flow Conversion Method. click Edit System. Create piping for the cold water system 22 In the 3D view.

29 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Diameter. enter 7''. 38 Move the cursor up to the top of the third sink. right-click the top DCW connector. 36 Move the cursor to the left. and click Draw Pipe. select the sink above the urinal. 31 On the Options Bar. and press Enter. 34 In the plan view. and click to place the pipe. and press Enter.25 Using the same method. enter 4'0”. For Offset. as shown. as shown. verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected. 26 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe. connect the second toilet. at the intersection of the water main pipe. click to the left of the urinal. 27 On the Placement Tools panel. for Offset. 254 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .2 7/8''. For Slope. 32 Move the cursor to the right. 35 In the Type Selector. enter 10'. 33 Click Modify. enter 0”/12”. 37 On the Options Bar. 28 In the Type Selector. verify that Automatically Connect is selected. select Water. for Offset. under Pipe Types. and click the connector. press Spacebar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the existing pipe. enter 3' . 30 In the plan view. select 3/4''.

39 Move the cursor to the left. select Connector 1 : Domestic Cold Water : Round : 1'' : In. Creating the Cold Water System | 255 . (Status Bar indicates Horizontal and [Pipes : Pipe Types : Water]). 43 Click the branch cold water pipe. and click to connect to the main cold water line. and click OK. 41 Select the top sink. 40 Click Modify. The sink is connected to the cold water branch piping. 42 In the Select Connector dialog. and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into.

add a water heater. 45 Close the file with or without saving it. 256 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . you create the hot water system. Creating the Hot Water System In this exercise. and add piping to connect the sinks in the menu’s room to the system.44 Using the same method. connect the middle sink to the branch pipe.

rvt. Creating the Hot Water System | 257 . click Training Files. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_06_i. expand the Unassigned folder. Notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) are listed.Design ➤ Floor Plans. select the 3 sinks. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Design is open.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing . 6 In the plan view.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. and expand the Default Domestic Hot Water system. open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . and position the browser at the bottom of the screen.Plumbing Plan . while pressing Ctrl.Overall. Create the hot water system 1 In the Project Browser. 4 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 2 In the Project Browser. 5 In the System Browser. and verify that Level 1 .

17 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. Default Other folders are created and the Water Heater is listed. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog.Tankless. click to position the water heater in the lower left corner of the utility room above the bathroom.7 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Hot Water. Default Domestic Cold Water. verify that DCW 107 is selected.6 Gallon. you edit the system to add equipment. Default Domestic Hot Water. and click Edit System. You add the water heater to the Domestic Cold Water system first. under Water Heater . (The folders are created according to the connectors available on the hot water heater. Add a water heater 11 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. for System Name. enter Domestic Hot Water 107. a best practice to maximize operation is to assign all components to the appropriate system and clear the default folders. as shown. 8 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ System Properties. and click OK. 10 In the System Browser. In later steps. When designing systems. in the Unassigned folder. 258 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 14 Click Modify.) Add the water heater to DCW 107 16 Select a sink in the men’s room. 15 In the System Browser. 13 In the plan view. the Domestic Hot Water 107 system is listed along with the 3 sinks (lavatories). select 0. 12 In the Type Selector.

23 On the Options Bar. Slope: 0''/12''. for Offset. verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected. Creating the Hot Water System | 259 . and select Draw Pipe. and click the water main line. and on the Edit System panel. 24 Move the cursor up. 25 On the Options Bar. right-click the middle left connector. 26 Move the cursor to the right. 22 In the Type Selector. select the water heater. 19 Select the water heater. specify: ■ ■ ■ Diameter: 1''. verify that Automatically Connect is selected. Connect the water heater to the cold water supply 20 In the plan view. as shown. 27 Click Modify. enter 1' 6''. click Finish Editing System.18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. The tankless water heater is connected to the cold water supply. Offset: 4' 6''. and press Enter. 21 On the Placement Tools panel. enter 10’.

right-click the bottom connector (domestic hot water). select 4'-6''. 30 On the System Tools panel. and in the System Selector. and for Offset. and click Draw Pipe. Connect the water heater to the hot water supply 34 Select the water heater. select a sink. and on the Placement Tools panel. 38 Move the cursor to the right. click Automatically Connect to switch it off. 35 On the Options Bar. 29 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. enter 1''. click Finish Editing System. enter 9' 0''. and press Enter. and click just to the left of the cold water pipe. enter 1' 6''. 32 Click the tankless hot water heater. for Diameter.Add the water heater to Domestic Hot Water 107 28 In the plan view. 36 Move the cursor down. for Offset. 33 On the Edit System panel. 260 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 37 On the Options Bar. select Domestic Hot Water 107. as shown. click Edit System. 31 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment.

39 Move the cursor down. Creating the Hot Water System | 261 . 41 Move the cursor down. as shown. enter 1’. 40 On the Options Bar. and press Enter. for Offset. and click just above the bottom sink. enter 2' 8''. 42 Click Modify.

44 Select the horizontal pipe that you just drew. 262 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . select the left sink (the one closest to the urinal). 45 Using the same method and the Connect Into tool. and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. connect the other 2 sinks to the hot water pipe.43 In the 3D view. The hot water pipe is automatically connected to the sink.

46 Close the file with or without saving it. 47 Optional: Open the RME_Plumb_Design_07_i.rvt project and view the vent piping for the plumbing system. Creating the Hot Water System | 263 .

264 .

265 . you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a fire protection system.Creating a Fire Protection System In this tutorial.

266 .

267 . go to http://www. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially.autodesk. In the left pane of the Open dialog. In this tutorial. with Space components placed in the areas throughout the model. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_01_i. and click Duplicate.Planning a Fire Protection System 11 The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. After finishing each exercise. If the tutorial training files are not present. click Training Files. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. Specifying Pipe Settings In this exercise. Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser. You will also check a Space Schedule that you can use to assess the coverage for the fire protection systems. However. and then you configure conversion settings that you will use when you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. To learn more about linking and preparing an architectural model. you will create a wet fire protection system for the second floor of an office building. you will use a project file that has already been linked to an architectural model. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. you begin work on the project that contains a wet fire protection system. You create a new pipe type. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. 2 Right-click Standard. see Planning Mechanical Systems in the Mechanical Systems tutorial. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. In this lesson. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory. A copy is made of the Standard pipe type. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. you can choose to save your work.rvt.

This offset elevation places the pipe branches at 9 feet above the referenced level for the views. so the pipe main will be offset from level 2. verify that 9' 0" is specified. For Pipe Type. duct. you created a new pipe type for the wet fire protection system and modified its type properties. This is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. NOTE Conversion settings are applied when you convert the pipe layout path to physical piping. The new pipe type is created based on the Standard pipe type. select Main. verify that 9' 0" is selected. 6 In the Project Browser. 268 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . Configuring the Conversion settings is usually a one-time process unless you need to change them during your project. For Pipe Type. 8 In the Mechanical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane. structural beams. 4 Right-click Fire Protection Wet. you create a sprinkler zone project parameter. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. In the left pane. You then assign spaces in the top portion of the plan to one zone and spaces in the bottom portion to another zone.3 Right-click the copy (Standard 2). This offset elevation places the pipe main at 9 feet above the referenced level for the views. For Offset. You now specify the conversion settings for the pipe branches. However. For Offset. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. You can configure the Conversion settings at the beginning or during your project. Configure pipe conversion settings 7 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings. you should configure or verify the Conversion settings before you convert a layout path. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. Next. and then click OK. For System Type. and enter Fire Protection Wet. 10 Close the file with or without saving it. verify that Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet is listed. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. you create project parameters and work with schedules. In this exercise. select Fire Protection Wet. you modify the type properties of the pipe. Level 2 is the referenced level for the views where you will be designing. and click Properties. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. The conversion settings for the Fire Protection Wet system type display. 9 Click OK. select Fire Protection Wet. For System Type. under Mechanical. Determining Zone Requirements In this exercise. for Material. You also configured the conversion settings for both wet and dry fire protection systems. select Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion ➤ Branch. or architectural components. select Carbon Steel. In the next exercise. click Rename.

Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.Design is highlighted.rvt. select Spaces. Determining Zone Requirements | 269 . enter Sprinkler Zone. select Fire Protection. click Training Files. select the upper half of the building. the space crossing lines display. enter Zone 1. Under Categories. select space Instruction 221 as shown.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. Create project parameters 1 In the Project Browser. and click Element Properties. 3 In the Project Parameters dialog. 6 In the drawing area. indicating that it’s the active view. 8 Using a crossing window. 7 In the Instance Properties dialog. and then click OK. click Add. For Group parameter under. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . You draw a crossing window from the lower left to the upper right of the area you want to enclose.Fire Protection Plan . under Fire Protection. for Sprinkler Zone. 5 Click OK twice. for Name. When you highlight a space using the cursor. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_02_i. right-click. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data.

Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and then click OK. including a calculated value parameter. You modify the schedules and add an embedded schedule in order to use the schedule as a design tool. under Fire Protection. to which you add various parameters. verify that only Spaces are selected. filter the bottom half of the building to select only Spaces. 12 In the Instance Properties dialog. 13 Using the same method. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_03_i. under Fire Protection.rvt. and then click OK. 11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. you create schedules for sprinkler design. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule In this exercise. select Zone 1. for Sprinkler Zone. 16 Close the file with or without saving it. enter Zone 2. for Sprinkler Zone. and then access instance properties. 270 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . 10 In the Filter dialog. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog.9 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. and click OK. 15 Press Esc to clear the selection. click Training Files.

9 On the Formatting tab. The schedule displays. Notice that the schedule name and the phase are automatically added. select Feet and fractional inches. 7 Click OK. ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a schedule parameter 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog. double-click on each column separator.Create a key schedule 1 In the Project Browser. enter Light. 11 Click OK twice. 13 To resize the column widths in the schedule. For Group parameter under. Select Schedule keys.Design is highlighted. select Maximum Spacing. select Length. and on the ribbon. select To the nearest 1'. For Units. select Spaces. create a parameter named Maximum Coverage Area that is an Area type and is grouped under Fire Protection.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .Fire Protection Plan . 14 Select the new header. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 271 . indicating that it’s the active view. Click OK. click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Rows: New. Add schedule data 12 Select the header in the Key Name column and enter Protection Area Type as the new header. For Type of Parameter. enter 15. and click Field Format. enter Protection Area Construction Type. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use project settings. enter Sprinkler Spacing and Coverage Area Schedule. Click OK. 8 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. click the Formatting tab. 10 In the Format dialog. enter Maximum Spacing. for Name. select Fire Protection. For Rounding. Obstructed-Combustible. 15 In the new row: ■ ■ In the Protection Area Type column. 6 Using the same method. click Add Parameter. For Key name. 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter data. For Name. In the Maximum Spacing column.

Click OK. and press Enter. Unobstructed Maximum Spacing 15' Maximum Coverage Area 200 SF 15' 12' 12' 12' 15' 15' 200 SF 90 SF 90 SF 90 SF 130 SF 130 SF 15' 130 SF Create a sprinkler schedule 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. Obstructed-Combustible Ordinary. Specify fields and create a calculated value parameter ■ In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ On the Fields tab. 16 Using the same method. double-click in the order listed: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Number Name Sprinkler Zone Level Area Protection Area Construction Type 272 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . Obstructed-Noncombustible Extra. Obstructed-Noncombustible Ordinary. Obstructed-Noncombustible Light. Obstructed-Combustible Extra. add more schedule data: Protection Area Type Light.■ In the Maximum Coverage Area column. 18 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Category. based on the parameter settings you specified previously. enter Sprinkler Schedule. NOTE The units of measure display automatically. under Available fields. For Name. enter 130. select Spaces. Unobstructed Extra. Unobstructed Ordinary.

The resulting formula is Area/Maximum Coverage Area. The Sprinkler Schedule displays. for Sort by. 22 Click OK twice. select Minimum Sprinklers. For Then by. For Type. under Other. select Level. 21 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use default settings. and click View Properties. In the Fields dialog. select Sprinkler Zone. select Common. enter Minimum Sprinklers. For Rounding. 20 On the Formatting tab.■ ■ ■ ■ Maximum Coverage Area Maximum Spacing Click Calculated Value. For Units. For Formula. In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. click Edit. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 273 . Enter the formula operator / after Area. for Sorting/Grouping. Click OK. click . and click OK. For Discipline. and click Field Format. select Area. select Fixed. Organize schedule data 23 Right-click in the schedule. Select Header and Blank line. 19 Click the Formatting tab. The Minimum Sprinklers calculated value is added to the scheduled fields (at the bottom of the list). 25 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. select 0 decimal place. This calculated value parameter allows you to immediately determine what spaces meet the sprinkler design requirements. select Number. and then use the method learned previously to select Maximum Coverage Area from the Fields dialog.

and then select Hidden field. click Edit. On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Fields. At the bottom of the dialog. select Grand totals. select Hidden field. ■ In the Format dialog. For Then by (second instance). for Filter. Under Field formatting. 26 Click OK 3 times. and then click Field Format. 29 In the Schedule Properties dialog. The schedule is arranged and sorted as specified. 28 In the Instance Properties dialog. For Fields. right-click the schedule. and click View Properties. 274 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . For Fields. 27 In the drawing area. for Filter by.■ ■ ■ ■ Select Header and Blank line. select Minimum Sprinklers. select Number. 30 Click OK twice. select Sprinkler Zone. verify that Use default settings is selected. and select Totals only. select Level. select Level equals Level 2.

Group schedule columns 31 In the drawing area. 33 Click in the grouped header cell. for Embedded Schedule. for Available fields. 32 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Headers: Group. double-click Type. and enter Maximum Sprinkler Spacing and Area Coverage. click Edit. 36 In the Instance Properties dialog. and then click Embedded Schedule Properties. and click View Properties. delete the word Maximum. use click and drag to select the last 4 schedule column headers. For Category. On the Formatting tab. for Fields. and select Totals only. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. 34 In the Maximum Coverage Area column and in the Maximum Spacing column. select Embedded Schedule. ■ ■ ■ 38 Click OK 3 times. under Other. Under Field formatting. System Name. select Grand totals.The schedule is filtered to show only zones on level 2. 37 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Embedded Schedule tab. and Count. select Calculate totals. Create an embedded schedule 35 Right-click the schedule. On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 275 . select Count. select Sprinklers.

51 In the Instance Properties dialog. 44 In the schedule. double-click FP . 42 In the Instance Properties dialog.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 46 With the space still selected. select Light. 43 Click Cancel. 48 In the floor plan. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.Modify space properties from the schedule 39 In the Project Browser. click in the floor plan to make it the active view. Notice that the selection you made in the schedule displays in the dialog. but their values are not determined. under Identity Data. Notice also that the Maximum Spacing and Maximum Coverage Area parameters that you created are listed under Fire Protection. under Identity Data. Unobstructed. select space 221 Instruction. When you change editable entries in the schedule to modify your system. notice that there is nothing specified for Protection Area Construction Type. 276 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . This digital database information source is the central concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM). 50 Access the instance properties. Unobstructed. 45 For Protection Area Construction Type. each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project.Fire Protection Plan Design. 40 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile to tile the floor plan and the Sprinkler Schedule. IMPORTANT A schedule in Revit MEP is not only a construction document but also a design tool. 49 Filter the selection for spaces only. and the spacing parameter values are evident. Unobstructed. As a result. 47 In the Instance Properties dialog. you are actually editing information in a database of building information. select Ordinary. The parameter change is evident in the schedule. select space 221 Instruction. and click OK. 41 In the plan view. for Protection Area Construction Type. and access the instance properties. select Ordinary. for Protection Area Construction Type. use a selection box to select the upper half of the building. under Identity Data. 52 Click OK.

Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 277 .53 Close the file with or without saving it.

278 .

By following the recommended workflow. you will understand the process. As you place the sprinklers. After finishing each exercise. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. click Training Files. go to http://www. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_01_i. Adding Sprinklers In this exercise. you follow a series of exercises that teach the recommended systems design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. you place host-based sprinklers in a ceiling plan view. methodology. As you create the system. 279 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. If the tutorial training files are not present. However.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to create a fire protection system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010.rvt. and specific techniques for designing fire protection systems in Revit MEP. and double-click Level 2 .Designing a Fire Protection System 12 In this tutorial. At the end of this tutorial. You will use the sprinkler schedule that you created in a previous exercise as a design guide for sprinkler placement. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory. you will learn various methods to quickly and precisely place sprinklers into the ceiling plan.FP_Ceiling to make it the active view.autodesk.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. you learn the best practices for designing systems with Revit MEP. you create a wet fire protection system using a linked architectural model of a building project. hosted to the linked architectural ceiling family. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. Place host-based sprinklers 1 In the Project Browser. you can choose to save your work.

When there is a small misalignment. 280 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . the layout path feature will attempt to create separate piping paths to the sprinklers. This action aligns sprinklers so that the piping layout is more efficient. After placing the initial sprinkler. 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. Sprinklers should either be aligned to each other or sufficiently separated to allow space for fittings. 6 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler. and arrange the views so that they are tiled horizontally. there is insufficient space between the 2 branches to place fittings and the conversion will fail. IMPORTANT The alignment of sprinklers is critical and will affect the conversion of a layout path to physical piping in later exercises. open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Sprinkler Schedule. When this happens. 3 In the Project Browser.2 Zoom in to the spaces in the lower right corner of the building. you copy and array sprinklers referencing the intersection of ceiling grids. 5 Click in the ceiling plan to make it the active view.

7 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel.Semi-Recessed Hosted : 1/2" Pendent from the Type Selector drop-down. 11 In the drawing area. because the schedule indicates that each of those spaces requires a minimum of 3 sprinklers. as shown. place the cursor over the approximate center of the ceiling tiles. Continue placing sprinklers You copy the existing sprinklers to place other sprinklers in spaces 203 and 204. and select Sprinkler . 10 Press Esc twice. select the sprinklers that you placed. while pressing Ctrl. Notice that the sprinkler schedule updates to show the sprinklers you added in space 202.Pendent . and click to place 3 sprinklers. because it calculates the number of sprinklers needed for each space and the maximum distance between sprinklers. You can use the Minimum Sprinklers column in the schedule as guidance when you design the fire protection system. Adding Sprinklers | 281 . 8 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face to place the sprinkler on the ceiling tile face. 9 In space Instruction 202.

282 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . and that Copy and Multiple are selected. and then press Esc. 14 Select the upper left corner near the copy selection as the copy start point. you place non-hosted sprinklers. 15 Select points in the 2 spaces to the left. as shown. Notice that a border displays to indicate the copy selection. Copies of the sprinklers are placed after you specify the end point.12 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. Also. Next. verify that Constrain is cleared. the cursor changes to indicate that the Copy tool is active. 13 On the Options Bar.

19 In the floor plan. 23 Right-click the sprinkler. 29 Press Esc. 21 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel.FP_Ceiling view. indicating that the design requirements for the corridor spaces have been met. it’s added to the space at an offset of 0' 0". 17 In the Project Browser. and 200C). 25 Click OK. by adding the minimum number of sprinklers for the 3 corridor spaces combined. Adding Sprinklers | 283 . 22 In the 200A Corridor space. Because the sprinkler is not hosted. and select Sprinkler-Upright : 1/2" Upright from the Type Selector drop-down. 16 Close the ceiling plan view. 20 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler. 28 Click the center of the existing sprinkler as the start point. For Number. zoom in to the entire wing in the lower right of the building. you adjust the offset. 18 Type WT. You place the system components based on the design requirements (sprinkler count and spacing) indicated in the schedule.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . and click Element Properties. specify a vertical offset. move the cursor to the right. and array the sprinklers in the 3 spaces that comprise the Corridor (200A.Fire Protection Plan .Design. under Constraints. This specifies an elevation for the sprinkler that makes it visible in the Level 2 . 24 In the Instance Properties dialog.Place non-hosted sprinklers In this section. enter 10' 6". 27 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Clear Group And Associate. Because this is an upright sprinkler with its connector facing down. enter 14' 6". for Offset. click to place a sprinkler at the beginning of the corridor as shown. Notice that the schedule updates. This number is determined in the schedule. Next. open Design ➤ FP . you place non-hosted sprinklers. it must be positioned above the piping to which it will be connected. and then tile the floor plan and schedule views horizontally. and press Enter. Array sprinklers 26 With the sprinkler still selected. and then click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. enter 11. click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Array. 200B.

Fire Protection Plan . In the left pane of the Open dialog. indicating that it’s the active view. you use the Layout Path tools to create the initial layout for the piping. Unlike logical connections (systems). IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system.Design is highlighted. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.rvt. 1 In the Project Browser. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_02_i. click Training Files. Creating a Piping System In this exercise. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . In this exercise. you placed 2 types of sprinklers using various placement methods. piping is necessary to perform calculations that reference the physical pipe geometry such as sizing. 284 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . physical connections (piping) are not required for systems designing.30 Close the file with or without saving it. you connect the sprinklers by creating a system (logical connection). However. A system is the logical connection between system components such as sprinklers.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . Then you simplify the layout using Modify tools from the Generate Layout tab on the ribbon to modify pipe branches prior to converting the layout to piping. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses including flow and pressure. In the next exercise. you create a wet sprinkler system and add piping to connect the sprinklers that you placed. and with piping (physical connection). This is the recommended workflow or best practice for systems creation in Revit MEP. and then creating the logical connection between these system components. After creating the logical connection. You create fire protection systems by placing sprinklers.

Connect sprinklers with a system 7 Draw a selection box (from left to right) around the sprinklers in the office spaces. 8 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Fire Protection Wet to create a fire protection wet system. and select Piping. all of the selected sprinklers have been moved from the Default Fire Protection Wet folder to the new system folder. In the System Browser. The wet system that logically connects the sprinklers displays in red to indicate that the new system is selected. 4 Drag the System Browser so that it docks at the bottom of the drawing area. The Fire Protection Wet system is created and listed in the System Browser. within the Piping Systems folder. IMPORTANT System components that you place are initially located under a default system category in the Unassigned folder. Explore the System Browser 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. As you assign sprinklers to systems. click View ➤ Systems. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems. as shown. 6 Expand the Unassigned ➤ Default Fire Protection Wet 1 system to view the level 2 sprinklers that you placed in the building. named Fire Protection Wet. Creating a Piping System | 285 . they are moved from the Unassigned folder to their respective assigned system folder. 5 Right-click the header. and assign the selected sprinklers to it. This occurs because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed in order to perform calculations such as flow. It does not indicate a pipe layout path.2 Zoom in to the wing at the lower right of the building.

19 Click OK. indicating the logical connection. 15 In the drawing area. expand Fire Protection Wet ➤ FP Wet_Zone2 to see the included sprinklers. Create the initial layout The Layout Paths tools let you specify a source for the system. select a sprinkler that belongs to FP Wet_Zone2. 11 With the system still selected. Verify that the above pipe type and offset settings are the same for Branch. enter FP Wet_Zone2. verify that Pipe Types: Fire Protection . The Edit Piping System panel displays. Notice that the Options Bar allows you to verify or modify the system name. You can now view the fire protection system hierarchy: the Fire Protection Wet 1 system logically connects the sprinklers. click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. double-click the Fire Protection Wet 1 system listing to view the list of sprinklers. and click Select. for System Name. For Offset. The Generate Layout tools are activated. and on the Options Bar. and make preliminary modifications to simplify the piping layout. system equipment. NOTE The Generate Layout feature is available whenever a system component is selected. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 9 feet above level 2. For Pipe Type. press Tab. You also verify the pipe conversion settings that you configured earlier in this tutorial.Now that the sprinklers are logically connected. Confirm and validate the system 9 In the System Browser. select an initial piping layout. 13 In the System Browser. select Branch. ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. In the left pane. click Settings. providing system editing tools. 14 Click Finish Editing System. and a piping layout preview displays. 10 Right-click Fire Protection Wet 1. 12 On the Options Bar.Wet is selected. and select the system. 18 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. 16 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. verify that Main is selected. place the cursor over a sprinkler. you use the System Browser to confirm and validate the system. TIP If you click in the drawing area and the red system display clears. you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. 17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Solutions. The selected fire protection wet system highlights in red. verify that 9' 0" is specified. and number of elements in the system. 286 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . Next. Revit MEP uses these settings to convert the preview layout path to physical piping.

When the layout is finished. click Place Base. click Solutions. The layout path solution displays (blue represents the main piping run. In general. the method for moving segments in a layout depends on the type of connection between a branch and the main piping: ■ Use (parallel movement control) to move the branch when an displays at the junction. 25 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Solution Type. for Diameter. 23 For Offset. and green represents branch lines). Modify the layout 26 You use the Modify tool to customize and simplify the layout. The main piping preview connects to the base component in the stairwell. 22 On the Options Bar.20 On the Generate Layout panel. 21 Click in the upper right corner of the stairwell to place the base component. enter -12' 0". and select solution 5. these settings will convert the base component to a 2" riser that extends from the bottom of Level 1 up to the connection with the level 2 sprinklers (9' 0"). as shown. The base component provides a source for the fire protection system. select 2". verify that Network is selected. Use the arrow keys to view all the solutions. (elbow control) Creating a Piping System | 287 . 24 On the Generate Layout panel.

29 Click Finish Layout. The pipe run geometry (main and branches) is created. This pipe run physically connects the wet system sprinklers for the 3 offices on level 2. and then drag the (elbow junction control) to merge the piping preview. First drag the tee or cross junction control to the desired location. A (parallel movement control) displays. On the Generate Layout panel. 288 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .■ Move each end separately when either a (tee junction control) or (cross junction control) displays at the junction. 27 Select the horizontal layout path segment connecting to the base point. 28 Drag the parallel movement control up to a point between the office/corridor walls and the corridor sprinklers. as shown. click Modify. All of the fittings required to connect the pipes to the system components are automatically generated.

View the system in 3D 30 Open FP . and then you create piping to physically connect them. select a different layout solution.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Fire Protection. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 289 . 31 Zoom in to the area with the sprinkler system. You add the remaining sprinklers to the current wet system to logically connect them. you complete the wet system by adding the remaining sprinklers to the FP Wet_Zone2 system using the Layout Path tool. Next.IMPORTANT Errors may occur when you attempt to create pipe geometry during layout path conversion or pipe sizing. you complete the level 2 wet fire protection system. or manually modify the pipe. or that offset elevations are incorrect. the Connect Into tool. 32 If necessary. The most common causes of these errors are that there is insufficient space to create a pipe or a fitting. and various manual pipe creation tools. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System In this exercise. 33 Close the file with or without saving it. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. Either relocate the system components.

indicating that it’s the active view.rvt.Design is highlighted. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_03_i. 290 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . and select the elbow fitting as shown. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . click Training Files. 4 Click the left plus sign to upgrade the fitting to a tee. 3 If necessary. 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Zoom in.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.Fire Protection Plan .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . In the left pane of the Open dialog.

The layout automatically creates a path connecting to the tee created earlier. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 291 . The selected sprinklers are assigned to FP Wet_Zone2. 11 On the Generate Layout panel. select any sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system. radiators. Connect the sprinklers with pipe 19 Zoom to the 3 spaces at the right end of the corridor. or a system component to display system tools. and so on) are logically connected by a system. click Add To System. You can confirm the sprinkler system assignment in the floor plan view or in the System Browser. 5 In the drawing area. 12 On the Options Bar. 8 In the corridor. click Finish Editing System. and select solution 5. 9 On the Edit System panel. 17 Use a selection box to select the remaining 3 sprinklers. Notice that the number of system elements updates on the Options Bar. 10 Select a sprinkler in the corridor. This allows you to modify the system (logical connection). for Solution Type. air terminals. 7 On the Edit Piping System panel. verify that Solutions is selected. and click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. 16 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. draw a selection box from lower left to upper right around the sprinklers as shown (don’t include the last 3 sprinklers). 13 Click Finish Layout. and pipe or duct is created. 6 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System so that you can add sprinklers to the system. System tools display on the Piping Systems tab. select a sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system. you can select the pipe or duct. 14 Close the System Browser. IMPORTANT After system components (sprinklers. Add remaining sprinklers to FP Wet_Zone2 system 15 In the drawing area. 18 Click Finish Editing System.The tee provides an open connector that will serve as a base when laying out the piping for the sprinklers in the corridor. verify that Network is selected. mechanical equipment.

27 On the Options Bar. click the intersection with the horizontal main pipe as the pipe endpoint.20 Open Design ➤ FP . 24 In the Piping Plan. and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection . 28 In the drawing area. 22 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into.Wet from the Type Selector drop-down. select 9'. 21 In the Piping Plan. Notice that horizontal and vertical segments of pipe were added. draw pipe from the last unconnected sprinkler to the main pipe. right-click. pan and zoom to the next unconnected sprinkler.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Fire Protection. and select the horizontal segment of main piping as shown. and then tile the views. 26 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel. for Offset. and click Draw Pipe. 25 Select the sprinkler. 29 Using the same method. 292 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . and select the leftmost unconnected sprinkler. and then press Esc. 23 View the result in the 3D view. zoom in to the corridor above the spaces that have piping.

it’s a visual indication that all components are connected correctly. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 293 . 33 Close the file with or without saving it.Layout in 2D Layout in 3D Verify connectivity 30 Close the 3D view. Because the whole system highlights. 31 In the plan view. 32 Use the cursor to highlight a section of the pipe. zoom so that you can see the entire wing with the fire protection system. and press Tab twice to highlight the entire system.

2 Zoom to the offices in the lower right corner. Create a section view 1 In the Project Browser. Specify section properties 7 In the drawing area.rvt. Click at the staircase to specify the section line endpoint.Design is highlighted.Adding Vertical Supply Piping In this exercise. click outside the corridor wall at the stairs to specify the section line start point. 5 Draw the section: ■ In the drawing area. indicating that it’s the active view. click Training Files. double-click on the section head to open the section view. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_04_i. 294 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section. You also place a hose reel cabinet in the building and connect it to the supply standpipe. for Scale. ■ 6 Press Esc. select 1/4" = 1'-0". In the left pane of the Open dialog.Fire Protection Plan .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. you create a section view that you will use to work with vertical piping. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . 4 On the Options Bar.

8 Right-click, and click View Properties. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Under Graphics, for Sub-Discipline, select FP - Design. For View Classification, select Design. Under Identity Data, for View Name, enter FP Section_Stair. For Default View Template, select MEP Section. Click OK.

10 In the Project Browser, right-click Design ➤ FP - Design ➤ Sections ➤ FP Section_Stair, and click Apply Default View Template. 11 Zoom to the top near the horizontal pipe. 12 If necessary, drag the top section boundary line up. 13 Select the elbow fitting, and then click the top + grip to upgrade the elbow fitting to a tee. 14 Select the tee fitting, and then right-click the top connector, and click Draw Pipe. 15 Press Spacebar. 16 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel, and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection - Wet from the Type Selector drop-down. 17 Move the cursor up, enter 7', and press Enter.

Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 295

18 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 19 Make Level 2 - Fire Protection Plan - Design the active view. Add mechanical equipment 20 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 21 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel, and select M_Hose Reel Cabinet Surface Mounted : 1"25mm from the drop-down list. 22 In the drawing area, click on the wall (host face) near the stairs to place the cabinet as shown, and then click Modify.

23 In the section view, zoom to the hose reel cabinet. 24 Select the cabinet, right-click the connector on the left of the cabinet, and click Draw Pipe.

296 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System

25 Verify that Fire Protection - Wet is selected from the Type Selector drop-down. 26 On the Options Bar, for Diameter, select 2"50mm. 27 On the Placement Tools panel, verify that Automatically Connect is active. 28 Connect to the vertical pipe (using the Intersection and Horizontal snaps), and then click Modify.

29 Close the section view. Add a valve 30 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. 31 In the alert dialog, click Yes to load a family. 32 In the Open dialog, navigate to Training\Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\Gate Valve - 2-12 Inch.rfa, and click Open. 33 In the Type Selector, verify that Gate Valve - 2" is selected. 34 Select the midpoint of the horizontal pipe that extends from the cabinet, as shown, and then click Modify.

Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 297

A 2" gate valve is placed in the 2" diameter pipe.

35 Open 3D Fire Protection, and zoom in to the cabinet to see the valve in 3D.

36 Close the file with or without saving it.

298 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System

Modifying Pipe Diameters
In this exercise, you modify the diameter of the pipes so that the pipes are a better fit with the design specifications. Because the pipe diameters depend on the number of sprinklers, you also create a sprinkler schedule to report the number of level 2 sprinklers. Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open ➤ Project.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_05_i.rvt.

Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP - Design ➤ 3D Views, and double-click 3D Fire Protection to make it the active view. 2 Enter WT to tile the 3D and floor plan views, and arrange them so that they’re tiled horizontally. 3 Adjust the view in both windows to view the entire fire protection pipe run as shown. You will work primarily in the floor plan view and validate the pipe geometry in the 3D view.

NOTE It is important to recognize the distinction between sizing and manually changing the diameter, height, or width. Changing the diameter, width, or height of pipe on the Options Bar is not considered sizing in Revit MEP. Sizing is performed using the Sizing tool (Sizing dialog) to size the pipe based on a series of parameters and calculations. The calculated size of a pipe is the result of the Sizing tool and not the result of a manual change of diameter, width, or height. Modify the diameter of the fire protection pipe run The majority of the pipe segments service no more than 2 sprinklers, and because the design specifications require a 1 inch diameter for pipes servicing 2 sprinklers, it’s more efficient to specify 1 inch diameter for all pipe runs, and then adjust branches servicing more than 2 sprinklers separately. 4 In the floor plan view, starting at the lower left corner of the wing, draw a selection box around the level 2 fire protection piping until just past the section line (don’t include the supply pipe or hose reel cabinet).

Modifying Pipe Diameters | 299

5 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 6 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Pipe Fittings and Pipes, and click OK. 7 On the Options Bar, for Diameter, select 1". 8 Click Modify. All selected piping is now 1" diameter.

Tag the pipes 9 In the floor plan view, zoom in to the right half of the wing (including the stairs). 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 11 Click to select a segment of pipe in the corridor. 12 If necessary, click Yes to load tags in the alert dialog, . 13 Navigate to Training\Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\Pipe Size Tag.rfa, and click Open. 14 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

Verify that Horizontal is selected. Clear Leader.

15 Place the cursor over the pipe segments shown, and after each segment highlights, click to place the tag. The tags accurately display the size of the selected pipe segments.

NOTE Tags are view specific. They display only in the view in which they were placed. Press Esc.

300 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System

Modify the diameter of the main 16 In the 3D view, select the linked architectural file. 17 On the View Control Bar, click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. By hiding the linked file, you isolate the piping to make it easier to select. 18 In the 3D view, select the vertical pipe below the hose cabinet.

19 Place the cursor over the section of main pipe feeding the last sprinkler, and when the section highlights, press Tab. This highlights the piping between the vertical pipe and the last segement. 20 Click to select the main piping between these points. The main piping is selected and displays in red.

Modifying Pipe Diameters | 301

21 On the Options Bar. for Diameter. 302 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . select 4". The diameter of the fire protection main piping changes.

as shown.22 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. and then tag the piping as shown. change the diameter of the other top segments to 1 1/4" to accommodate sprinklers. 24 In the drawing area. 26 Using the same method. The pipe diameter is modified. select the top segment of branch pipe in space Instruction 202 (next to the stairs). Modify the diameter of branch pipes The number of sprinklers serviced by a branch determines the pipe size used for that branch. for Diameter. 23 Close the 3D view. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 303 . 25 On the Options Bar. and maximize the floor plan. select 1 1/4".

28 Close the file with or without saving it. allowing you to immediately verify the pipe diameters. Feel free to modify the systems or create entirely new fire protection systems. You added tags to pipes. Explore different system designs and discover the power of Revit MEP. You learned how to manually change the diameter of a pipe. you created a wet fire protection system. and the difference between how the software sizes pipe and how to manually modify pipe diameter. The completed fire protection system is included in the RME_FP_Design_06_i. In this tutorial.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ 05_Fire Protection Systems folder under Training Files. For additional practice. use the methods that you learned and create the level 1 fire protection wet system. you used various selection methods to modify the level 2 fire protection pipe run diameters. Use the same system components and parameters as you did for level 2.27 This completes the Fire Protection tutorial. The pipe run now complies with the design criteria. In this exercise. You also learned the difference between creating rigid physical pipe connections and creating logical systems. 304 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .

and create schedules for construction documentation for a project. 305 . create details. add annotations and dimensions. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to create views.Documenting a Project In this tutorial.

306 .

2 In the Project Browser. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_01_i. If the view included detail graphics. click Training Files. dependent views. Apply a view template 4 In the Project Browser. callout views for a typical HVAC view and a detail view.Design ➤ Floor Plans. right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. you duplicate an existing floor plan view to create a duct plan view.rvt. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. matchlines. You learn to create: ■ ■ ■ ■ a duplicate plan view. and view references. under Floor Plans. you begin the construction documentation for the building project. 3 In the Rename View dialog.Creating Documentation Views 13 In this lesson. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . a plumbing isometric riser from a 3D design view. and click Properties. right-click Level 1. right-click Copy of Level 1. you’d select Duplicate with Detailing. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. and click OK. Duplicating Plan Views In this exercise. You then change the properties of the new view by applying a view template. and click Rename. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 307 . and apply a view template. You select Duplicate because only model elements are included in the original view. Duplicate the Level 1 floor plan to create a Level 1 duct plan 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

to delineate splits in a large floor plan. 5 Make sure Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is the active view. and the floor plan is moved to its new location in the Project Browser hierarchy.rvt. and then press Esc. as shown. create dependent views for areas B and C. right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 2 Right-click the dependent view title. click to specify the first point of the matchline to the left of the plan and below gridline C. 10 In the drawing area.5 In the Instance Properties dialog. more focused. 308 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . 6 In the Project Browser. 7 Click Create Matchline Sketch tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Matchline Properties. select HVAC Duct Plan-Documentation. This is useful when breaking up plans with varying geometries across levels. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. under Identity Data ➤ Default View Template. views and put them on the sheet. and click Apply Default View Template. You can modify the visibility of matchlines in specific views. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_02_i. right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. You crop a dependent view to show only the area marked by the matchline. Duplicate a view to create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. 6 Click View tab ➤ Sheet Composition panel ➤ Matchline. and click OK. Create matchlines Matchlines are used with dependent views. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 In the Rename View dialog. and click OK. The smaller (dependent) views inherit view properties and view-specific elements from the primary view. 11 Click beyond the exterior wall of the wing to specify the second point. The view is automatically updated with the defined graphical style. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click Rename. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. 4 Using the same method. 9 Click OK. verify that the top and bottom constraints are Unlimited. Creating Dependent Views Because large buildings cannot fit on a single sheet at 1/8" = 1' scale. Dependent views keep the primary/parent view as the working drawing and allow you to create smaller. you use dependent views to accommodate such large buildings. click Training Files.

Creating view references 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ View Reference. and then press Esc. 17 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog. Click OK. Creating Dependent Views | 309 . 14 Click Finish Matchline. apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B to the other view reference. 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. select Double Dash 5/8". click above and below the modified matchline to create view references (displayed as ./ ---).12 Draw a second matchline that spans the floor plan above gridline H. and click OK. for Target view. select Matchline: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Line Color. select 11. select black. click the current value. Modify object styles 15 Zoom in to the left part of the upper matchline. 20 Select the upper view reference and. In the Color dialog. 13 Press Esc twice. 19 In the drawing area. on the Options Bar. For Line Weight. select Floor Plan: Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. For Line Pattern. 21 Using the same method.

22 Add a view reference below the lower matchline. as shown. drag Plan_B onto Sheet M202 and Plan_C onto Sheet M203. 310 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . crop the dependent views for plans B and C. and zoom to each of the view references. 23 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. 25 Using the same method. The view references in the primary view are automatically updated as the views are placed on sheets. 27 Using the same method. indicating the detail and sheet number of each view. 28 Make Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan the active view. Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C 26 Open Sheet M201. 24 Use the grips on the crop lines to modify the view boundaries. and drag Plan_A from the Project Browser onto the sheet. and apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C to it.

rvt. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 311 . 3 Click Modify Section Boxes tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin. and click Properties. Click OK. For Sub-Discipline. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and click to select it. right-click 3D Plumbing.29 Close the file with or without saving it. right-click Plumbing Isometric . and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 2 Zoom in. press Tab twice to highlight the pipe run. and click Apply Default View Template. you copy a 3D design view and modify it to create a 3D plumbing isometric riser for domestic water. for View Name. 4 In the Project Browser. select Plumbing. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. enter Plumbing Isometric . Duplicate a view and specify properties 1 In the Project Browser. right-click Copy of 3D Plumbing. and select the section box. 6 In the Project Browser. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser In this exercise. 7 Zoom in to the plumbing system. for View Classification. 5 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data.Domestic Water. You pin the view to keep it from being moved inadvertently. select Plumbing Isometric.Domestic Water. The section crop lines no longer display. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_03_i. Under Graphics. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing-Design ➤ 3D Views. For Default View Template. select Documentation. 8 Highlight a segment of the top horizontal piping.

change the line weight to 4 and the line pattern to Dash Dot 3/16". and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Element. 12 Using the same method. 312 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . press Tab 3 times. 10 In the View-Specific Element Graphics dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Weight. The selected piping displays as a dashed line. Click Apply. and click to select it. select Dash. 11 Select the vertical segment of pipe coming off the tankless water heater. and then click OK. select 3.9 Right-click. For Pattern.

This hides the sanitary piping in order to create a domestic water supply riser isometric view. and click Hide in View ➤ Elements. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 313 .13 Highlight a segment of horizontal pipe below the sinks. press Tab 3 times (until the entire pipe network highlights. 14 Right-click. and click to select it. as shown).

press Tab 3 times. In the drawing area. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. and rename the new view Plumbing Isometric . Click in the drawing area to start a text label. 18 Using methods learned previously. On the View Control Bar. and then click in empty space in the drawing to end the label. create a sanitary riser isometric view: ■ Duplicate the Plumbing Isometric .15 Press Esc. Unhide the sanitary waste piping: ■ ■ ■ ■ On the View Control Bar. 17 Label the fixtures as shown.Sanitary Waste. highlight a segment of the sanitary piping. 16 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. click Close Reveal Hidden Elements. Right-click. On the View Control Bar. ■ ■ ■ Hide domestic cold water and domestic hot water piping. 314 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . and click to select it. and click Unhide in view ➤ Elements. click Reveal Hidden Elements.Domestic Water view with detailing.

26 Close the file with or without saving it. In the Format dialog. and click to place the spot slope annotation. 23 Click on the horizontal pipe below the sinks to select it. the callout head on the original view is updated with the sheet information. 25 Press Esc twice. 24 Move the cursor above the pipe. verify that Common is selected. 20 In the Project Units dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Discipline. 22 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Spot Slope. select To the nearest 1/8". as shown.Add a spot slope annotation 19 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Units. click on the Format value. When the view is associated with a sheet. Creating Callout Views In this exercise. for Rounding. 21 Click OK twice. and then place the callout view on a sheet. For Slope. you use a plan view to create a callout view. Creating Callout Views | 315 .

beginning at the upper left and ending at the lower right. 7 Modify the callout leader: ■ ■ Select the callout boundary. 4 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel. and select Floor Plan from the Type Selector drop-down.rvt. indicating that it’s the active view. 5 On the Options Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. for Scale. select 1/4"=1'-0''. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_04_i. click Training Files. and move it to the bottom right corner of the boundary. Select the Drag Head control (the control on the leader line that is closest to the callout head). 6 Draw the callout around the ductwork as shown. Create a floor plan callout 1 In the Project Browser. 316 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is highlighted. 2 Zoom in to an office in Area C (the bottom section of the plan). 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout.

and click in the empty space at the top center to place it. using the same method. Creating Callout Views | 317 . drag it to the sheet. select Callout of Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. 10 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles.HVAC Duct Plan & Sections. 13 In the Project Browser. Modify callout boundary line weight 9 Press Esc to clear the selection. under Sheets (all). 11 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog: ■ For the Callout Boundary category. select 5. ■ Expand the Callout Boundary category and. double-click M601 . for Line Weight.8 Create an angled leader line by dragging the Drag control located at the center of the leader as shown. ■ Place the view on a sheet 12 In the Project Browser. Click OK. change the line weight for the Callout Leader Line to 5.

15 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. and select the viewport. enter Callout of Level 1 HVAC WSHP TYP. select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation. 17 In the Project Browser.Rename the detail view and modify view settings 14 Zoom to the callout view. Click OK. For Default View Template. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. Ductwork in coarse detail 318 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . right-click the callout view. The display of the ductwork changes from coarse detail to fine. and click Apply Default View Template. enter WSHP PART PLAN. for View Name. For Title on Sheet.

Ductwork in fine detail Create a detail callout 18 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. The detail callout head has been updated with sheet information. 20 Double-click the section head at the left of the stairs to open Room 214 Section. Creating Callout Views | 319 . 19 Zoom in to the area near the central stairs and section markers.

27 Right-click Typical WSHP Detail. right-click the detail view. and click Apply View Template. and click Rename. 320 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . 24 Double-click the callout head to open the detail view. and click OK.21 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout. 22 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel. select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation. 28 In the Apply View Template dialog. 29 Close the file with or without saving it. and click OK. 23 Draw the callout boundary around the level 1 ductwork as shown. 25 In the Project Browser. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . enter Typical WSHP Detail.Design ➤ Detail Views (Detail). The view is changed to a hidden line display and is moved to its new position in the Project Browser hierarchy. and select Detail from the Type Selector drop-down. under Names. 26 In the Rename View dialog.

and diffuser tags to an HVAC documentation plan. duct tags. you learn how to: ■ add text notes. and annotation to create a legend. ■ create permanent dimensions in a lighting plan so that you can control the location of specific fixtures. 321 . linetypes. symbols. ■ work with model-based components.Working with Annotations and Dimensions 14 In this lesson.

4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. 2 Zoom in to the offices in the lower right corner of the building in Area C. 3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. under Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 322 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 6 Click to start the text note in between 2 of the branch ducts serving the perimeter supply air grilles.Creating Annotations In this exercise. 8 With the text still selected. as shown.rvt. double-click Level 2 HVAC Duct Plan to make it the active view. 7 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing. you work with tag and leader types to create an annotated HVAC documentation plan. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_01_i. and select 3/32" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. click Training Files. use the drag grips to modify the text box width and position it so that it doesn’t cross the ductwork or wall. and enter RUN DUCT THROUGH OPEN WEB JOISTS. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Add a text note to an HVAC documentation plan 1 In the Project Browser. 5 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Center).

as shown. select a supply diffuser. verify that Leader is cleared. 11 Click Modify Text Notes tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Add Leader: Left Straight. Creating Annotations | 323 . 13 Press Esc to clear the selection. 15 On the Options Bar. 12 Use the leader end grips to drag the arrows to point to the 2 branch ducts. Add diffuser and duct tags by category 14 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. and then click Right Straight. a segment of round duct. 16 In the drawing area. and a segment of rectangular duct.9 Press Esc twice. Add leaders 10 Select the text box. a return diffuser. Use the leader segment grips to create horizontal leader segments from the text box.

Tag remaining diffusers 18 Using the same method.rfa and Flex Duct Tag Round. 23 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. and click Open. verify that the Loaded Tag is Bottom Elevation Duct Tag. select Bottom Elevation Duct Tag. 24 On the Options Bar. you can annotate the element with a second tag type. click Load. for Ducts. 20 In the Tags dialog. navigate to Annotations ➤ Duct. Place a loaded tag and modify its orientation In order to display additional information about an element. under Category. move diffuser tags off the ductwork. clear Leader. If necessary. Load tags from library 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel drop-down ➤ Loaded Tags. 22 In the Tags dialog. 21 In the Load Family dialog. 17 Click Modify.The information on each tag varies according to the category of element.rfa. tag the remaining diffusers in the area. 324 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . and click OK.

select the select the large pipe on the right as shown. Place tags with leaders 28 In the Project Browser. 27 Select the large segment of rectangular duct connected to the WSHP. 30 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 31 On the Options Bar. select Horizontal. select the large horizontal segment of rectangular duct and the round duct. Leader. Creating Annotations | 325 . as shown. and then press Esc.25 In the drawing area. 26 On the Options Bar. open Documentation ➤ HVAC-Pipe ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan_A. 29 Zoom in to the piping near the stairs in the upper right corner of the building in Area A. specify Tag Orientation as Vertical. 32 In the drawing area. and Attached End.

as shown. select Free End. 34 In the drawing area. 35 Click above and to the right of the leader start point to place the leader as shown.33 On the Options Bar. 326 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . click the top horizontal pipe in the corridor. for Leader.

40 Using the method learned previously. That’s because you changed a type property. and click OK. and all elements of that type are affected. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. for Leader Arrowhead. not simply an instance property. lay out. 37 In the drawing area. Notice that the new tags you place use the new style.36 Press Esc twice. tag the bottom horizontal pipe as shown. select the last tag placed. and the tags placed previously have changed to the new style as well. Creating Dimensions In this exercise. and lock lighting fixtures. 39 In the Type Properties dialog. Creating Dimensions | 327 . you use temporary dimensions to locate. 38 Click Modify Pipe Tags tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. select Dot Open 1/16". Edit a tag type You edit the type properties for the pipe size tag so that you can specify a different leader style.

2 Zoom in to the left side of the plan. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan_A is highlighted. 8 Click Modify Dimensions tab ➤ Witness Lines panel ➤ Edit Witness Lines. click Training Files. drag the witness line on the right to the face of the wall on the left side of the selected lighting fixture. indicating that it’s the active view. and then select the interior face of the wall. Continue the dimension string using the Edit Witness Lines feature 7 In the drawing area. 5 Click to create a permanent dimension. 9 Select the reference line at the center of the next fixture to the right. You can modify the preferred condition for dimension face selection. notice that Prefer : Wall faces is selected. 10 Repeat for the remaining 2 top fixtures. 3 Select the upper left lighting fixture. 4 Using the Move Witness Line control. select the dimension line. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_02_i. 12 Press Esc. 6 Press Esc to clear the selection.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Lay out lighting fixtures using temporary and permanent dimensions 1 In the Project Browser. 11 Click in any empty space in the drawing area to finish. 328 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . On the Options Bar.

Creating a Legend | 329 . enter 8'. lock the dimensions of the interior fixtures for the remaining 2 rows. 16 Press Esc. 19 Using the same methods. and offset them 8' from the wall. you create an HVAC Sheet Metal legend using model-based legend components. Because the dimensions are locked. Training File ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. click the 3 interior locks on the line.13 Using the same method. 15 To lock the dimensions between the interior fixtures. Creating a Legend In this exercise. linework. Lock dimensions between fixtures 14 Select the center dimension line. and notes.3 1/2"). Modify dimensions to offset fixtures 17 Select the right lighting fixture in the center line. the fixtures shift to maintain constraints. and press Enter. annotation symbols. 20 Close the file with or without saving it. 18 Select the dimension value (7' . add dimension strings for the remaining 2 rows of lighting fixtures in the room.

For Scale. Create a legend view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Legends drop-down ➤ Legend. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_03_i.rvt. enter Diffuser Legend. Create a legend title 3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. click Training Files. Click OK.Sidewall : 18 x 8 330 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions .■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. 6 Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. and enter DIFFUSER LEGEND. 4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel.8 Neck. and select 1/4" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. 2 In the New Legend View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ For Family. 10 Using the same method. select 1/4" = 1' -0". For View. select Floor Plan. Add model element detail components 7 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Legend Component. 5 Click in the drawing area. place: ■ ■ ■ Air Terminals : Return Diffuser : 24 x 24 Face 12 x 12 Connection Air Terminals : Exhaust Grill : 24 x 24 Face 12 x 12 Connection Air Terminals : Supply Diffuser . select Air Terminals : Supply Diffuser . ■ 9 In the drawing area. click below the title to place the diffuser.Rectangular Face Round Neck : 24x24 .

11 Press Esc. and select 1/8" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down list. Add detail component text descriptions 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. and enter SUPPLY DIFFUSER. 14 In the drawing area. Creating a Legend | 331 . click next to the top diffuser. 13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. 15 Using the same method and using the blue dashed reference lines for alignment. annotate the remaining components: ■ ■ ■ RETURN DIFFUSER EXHAUST GRILL SIDEWALL SUPPLY DIFFUSER 16 Click Modify.

28 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel. and then click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE . 22 Zoom in to the copied component. 29 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Symbol.Create a legend symbol 17 In the Project Browser. and then press Esc. select the top and bottom detail lines on the left side of the component. and click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Mirror.RISE symbol for the copy start point. select Thin Lines from the Line Style drop-down. 18 Select the ELEVATION INCLINE . 19 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy.DROP and its text note. 24 Select the component’s break line. 27 While pressing Ctrl. 23 Delete the arrow and the left 3 lines at the center of the component. 26 Press Esc. 332 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 20 Click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE . 25 Select the center reference line as the mirror line. 21 Press Esc. The selected detail lines are now thin.DROP symbol to specify the copy end point. open HVAC_SM_DUCT_CONDITION legend view.

mirror the text on the center reference line of the component. 38 Drag Diffuser Legend from the Project Browser to the bottom of the sheet. 33 Click to the left of the left break line. and then click Modify. 32 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text.MECHANICAL LEGEND. in the Ductwork-Sheet Metal column.30 Select Spot Elevation . 36 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing. and then change the text note to CONNECT NEW DUCT TO EXISTING DUCT. 35 Change the text on the right to N.Target Filled from the Type Selector drop-down. double-click Sheets (all) ➤ M100 . 31 Click below the center of the bottom component to place the symbol. and then click Modify. enter E. 34 Using the method learned previously. Place legend views on a sheet 37 In the Project Browser. Creating a Legend | 333 .

click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel.39 With the viewport still selected. 334 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 41 Close the file with or without saving it. 40 Press Esc. and select No Title from the Type Selector drop-down.

verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Power Plan ➤ Level 1 Power Plan_B is highlighted. click Training Files. detail groups. 2 Double-click the right elevation head to open the Power Riser . and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_01_i. A drafting view using detail components. Tag electrical panels 1 In the Project Browser.113 East elevation view. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. A drafting detail by importing a CAD detail. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you will create: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A model-based detail of an electrical power riser diagram. A 3D isometric detail view of a typical WSHP Make Up detail. indicating that it’s the active view. A detail callout that references another view. Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail In this exercise. 335 . and text. you place elevation views on a sheet and then arrange them as a single view in preparation of creating a one-line diagram.rvt.Detailing 15 In this lesson.

you place both the North and East elevation views on a sheet. and then modify and align the views. Notice that the software displays a dashed line so that you can align the views as you place them. Place the view close to the left edge of the sheet so that there is room in the same space for the east elevation view.3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. Next.113 East on the sheet. 5 In the drawing area. 8 Using the same method. 7 Drag the Power Riser .113 North elevation view from the Project Browser to the empty area at the upper left of sheet E101. clear Leader.Electrical Power Riser Diagram to make it the active view. select each of the 2 panelboards. and click to place it. Place views on a sheet 6 In the Project Browser. double-click Sheets (all) ➤ E101 . place Power Riser . 336 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 4 On the Options Bar.

under Identity Data. and click Deactivate View. 15 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click Activate View. for Title on Sheet. and click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. enter Electrical Power Riser Diagram. and use the filled circle drag control on the right to drag the end of the level line to the right. 12 Select the Level 1 line. Doing this enables you to later drag the 113 East view to the left. and click OK. Modify level lines 11 In the drawing area. select the 113 North view. 10 Zoom to the power riser elevations on the sheet. 13 Right-click. right-click. Modify a viewport title 14 Select the title of the 113 North view.9 Press Esc. giving the appearance of a single view. Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail | 337 .

and select No Title from the Type Selector drop-down. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. and click Activate View. 17 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. 20 Select the 113 East elevation view again. right-click. move the view to the left so that it overlaps the 113 North view. 21 Using the drag control. You also create a detail group and annotate the diagram. 22 Press Esc. as shown. Align elevation views to resemble a single view 18 In the drawing area.Remove a viewport title display 16 Select the 113 East view. Creating Detail Wiring In this exercise. select the 113 East elevation view. right-click. you add wiring to the diagram. In the next exercise. 338 | Chapter 15 Detailing . you use detail lines to create wiring for the one-line electrical riser diagram. 19 Select the Level 1 line. You combine views in order to create a one-line diagram.

enter Electrical Power. and select Electrical Power from the Type Selector drop-down. click New. 3 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Line Styles. notice that there are no snaps active. verify that Chain is selected. for Name. for Line Weight. In the left pane of the Open dialog. zoom in to the service transformer (T-SVC) located at the bottom left of the Power Riser . 2 Close the Project Browser. Under Modify Subcategories. verify that Sheets (all) ➤ E101 . click Training Files. draw lines to represent the wiring to the switchboard (SWB). In the New Subcategory dialog.113 North view.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. select 6. In the Line Styles dialog. indicating that it’s the active view. Draw linework to create a wiring diagram 5 In the drawing area. Zoom in as necessary and use the drag controls to make sure the lines clean up properly. Creating Detail Wiring | 339 . 8 On the Options Bar. expand Lines. as shown.rvt. 7 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Element panel. Create a linetype 1 In the Project Browser. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_02_i. 9 Beginning at the transformer.Electrical Power Riser Diagram is highlighted. 4 In the Line Styles dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category. As you draw. and click OK. This maximizes the drawing window so that you can more easily add wiring to the riser diagram. and then click OK. 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line.

add lines to represent wiring between the switchboard and a panel on level 3 (MDP_3). enter 1/8". 12 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset. 11 Using the same method. 14 Click to place lines offset to the right and above the first 2 lines from the switchboard. for Offset.10 Press Esc. 13 On the Options Bar. 340 | Chapter 15 Detailing . as shown.

17 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim. TIP When you use the Trim tool.15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. so that the result is as shown. 19 Select the horizontal line to the right of the first line. you select the portion of the line that you want to keep. 18 Select the vertical detail line that connects into MDP_2 as the first line to trim. 16 Draw a line to connect the offset line to MDP_2. Creating Detail Wiring | 341 .

20 Continue adding detail lines until the diagram is wired as shown. 21 Zoom in to panel MP-1B. and then copy them to multiple locations in the diagram. Add a break symbol and note You create the break symbol and text note once. 342 | Chapter 15 Detailing .

Copy the symbol and text 30 Select the text. and select 3/32" Arial Transparent from the Type Selector drop-down.22 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. Creating Detail Wiring | 343 . The name of the detail arc (Start-End-Radius) indicates the order in which you select the defining points of the arc. 27 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. 26 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ No Leader. and use the drag controls to resize the text box and position it as shown. and type SEE MECHANICAL CONNECTION SCHEDULE. 29 Click Modify. 23 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Start-End-Radius Arc). 24 Draw a “cap” (the break symbol) over the 3 vertical lines at the top of the panel. 28 Click above the cap. 25 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. as shown. and then click Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: (Center).

344 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 32 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 35 Click the endpoint of each of the corresponding lines for the other 2 mechanical panels (MP-2B and MP-3B) as the copy endpoints.31 While pressing Ctrl. select the text and the detail arc of the break symbol. select Multiple. 34 Click the endpoint of the left vertical line under the break symbol as the copy start point. 33 On the Options Bar.

and then press Esc. enter 3/32".36 Press Esc.5. Creating Detail Wiring | 345 . click to specify the start point of the first horizontal line. and press Enter. enter 0 0. You enter exact values for each line length. 42 On the Options Bar. 43 Click twice to place 2 more lines below the first line. for Offset. Create a ground wire You use 3 detail lines to create a ground wire symbol. 39 Move the cursor to the right. 41 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset. 38 Beginning below the level 1 switchboard. 40 Press Esc. 37 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line.

Create a detail group By grouping the lines that represent the ground wire. click on the length dimension value. drag the Modify Group Origin control to the midpoint of the top detail line.125. select all 3 lines. 49 In the Create Detail Group dialog. 46 In the Project Browser. you can ensure that they stay together. 346 | Chapter 15 Detailing . Notice that the new Ground group displays in the Project Browser. 47 In the drawing area. You can also specify the origin point of the group so that it is placed accurately. expand Groups ➤ Detail. change the length of the bottom line to 0 0. 45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down ➤ Project Browser to open the browser view. 50 With the group selected. enter Ground.44 Edit the offset lines: ■ ■ ■ Select the middle line. Press Esc. and press Enter. while pressing Ctrl. 48 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group. and then press Esc. and click OK. for Name.25. enter 0 0. Using the same method.

and then click the endpoint of the detail line as the move end point. 54 Select the group. 56 Draw a detail line to connect each ground wire group to its transformer.51 Using the method learned previously. 55 Click below each of the transformers (TP-1B. and TP-3B) to place the ground wire group in those locations. TP-2B. and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar. 53 Click the origin of the detail group as the move start point. 52 Select the detail group. Creating Detail Wiring | 347 . draw a detail line that extends from the bottom right of the switchboard.

Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and click Orient to View ➤ Sections ➤ Typical Make Up Air. you will create the Mechanical Connection Schedule referenced here. In later exercises. for Name. 3 In the Rename View dialog. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail In this exercise.rvt. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 58 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin. 5 Zoom in to view the section. select the entire Electrical Riser Power Diagram viewport. right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Duct & Equipment. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_03_i. 348 | Chapter 15 Detailing . and click OK. 2 Right-click the copy.Pin wires and view You pin the view and all detail lines so that they don’t get moved accidentally. 59 Close the file with or without saving it. 57 Using a crossing window (beginning at lower left and extending to upper right). You use a view template to isolate the mechanical components so that you can annotate the detail components. you duplicate an existing view and orient it to a section view in order to create an isometric detail view. and will place it on sheet E01. Prepare the view 1 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. enter Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail. 4 Right-click the ViewCube.

click Home. 7 On the ViewCube. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 349 . and drag the top grip down so that the section includes only the first floor. and Left sides converge. and then press Esc.6 Select the section box. and then click the corner where the Top. Back.

Apply a view template 8 In the Project Browser. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. Under Names. Hide elements in a view 10 Select the long rectangular duct at the rear. select 3D HVAC Iso. 13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments. select 3D Views. Click OK. 12 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. You hide this duct because it’s not part of the detail being created. and select 3/32" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. Walkthroughs. right-click Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail. 9 In the View Templates dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Show Type. Annotate the view 11 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. This isolates the mechanical components by turning off the architectural components. 350 | Chapter 15 Detailing . and click Apply View Template. right-click.

Typical. 19 Complete the text labels. Move the cursor down and to the left. and click to specify the second leader point. 15 Using the same method. 16 Select the text for the 8x8 duct. Change text alignment 17 With the text still selected. Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 351 . click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: 18 Press Esc.14 Place the label: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click on the long rectangular duct to start the leader. (Right). label the connecting duct 8x8 Makeup Air to Return Plenum (Provide Motorized Damper). Enter Makeup Air Duct from AHU-1. as shown. and drag the controls to resize the text box as shown. Move the cursor to the left and click to specify the text insertion point.

26 Zoom to the drawing extents. Place the view on a sheet 27 In the Project Browser. select the label and use the Drag and Rotate controls that display. 28 Drag the new isometric view from the Project Browser onto the sheet. as shown.To rotate and reposition a text label. and use the drag controls to position the boundaries around the detail. 25 Click OK. type VP to open the instance properties for the view. select Crop View and clear Crop Region Visible. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. 22 Zoom out so that the isometric detail and the crop region are both visible. and then click OK. and under Extents. select Crop Region Visible. under Extents. Modify the view 20 In the drawing area. 352 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 23 Click on the crop region. open Sheets (all) ➤ M601-HVAC DUCT PLAN & SECTIONS. 24 Access the instance properties for the view.

2 In the New Drafting View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. you: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a drafting view. Create a drafting view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Drafting View. The new view is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Drafting Views (Detail). Use detail lines to create a detail group.rvt. 3 In the Project Browser. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_04_i. Work with a filled region that represents a detail component. 30 Close the file with or without saving it. and then select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down. By defining a Sub-Discipline and a View Classification. For Scale. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. you can more accurately locate the view in the Project Browser hierarchy. select 3" = 1'-0". enter Typical Floor Drain Detail. select the isometric view. Annotate the drafting view using keynotes and text notes. Place a detail component. and click Properties.29 In the drawing area. Drafting Detail Components In this exercise. Drafting Detail Components | 353 . right-click the view name. Click OK. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

11 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Rectangle).4 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. 14 Drag the cursor down and to the left so that the rectangle is 1' 8" x 5 1/2". select Plumbing. For View Classification. 12 On the Element panel. and select Floor Drain with Waterproofing-Section from the Type Selector drop-down. as shown. 7 Click in the middle of the drawing area to place the component. 354 | Chapter 15 Detailing . select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down. Click OK. 9 Zoom in to the component. 6 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Element panel. Notice the new location of the view in the Project Browser. for Sub-Discipline. click the point at the top of the drain. as the rectangle start point. Place a floor drain detail component 5 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component. select Documentation. 13 In the drawing area. 8 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Use a filled region to create a concrete slab 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Region drop-down ➤ Region.

Concrete. select C. click to select the indicated points in succession from left to right to define the new boundary. 25 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ 26 Zoom to the lower left corner of the filled region. 18 With the filled region still selected. select the filled region. Modify the boundary of the filled region You edit the boundary of the concrete slab so that it matches the contour of the metal deck.I. 21 In the drawing area. 24 Click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Edit Boundary. 17 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Region panel ➤ Finish Region. click the bottom left corner of the filled region to specify the group insertion point. (Line). and then press Esc. 20 Select 1. and click OK. 27 Using the following illustration as a guide.5 NR 18 from the Type Selector drop-down. 22 Click Modify. Drafting Detail Components | 355 . click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Arrange ➤ Send to Back drop-down ➤ Send to Back. Add a structural metal deck detail group 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Group drop-down ➤ Place Detail Group. for Type. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog.P. 23 In the drawing area.15 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Region Properties.

356 | Chapter 15 Detailing . and then select the base of the slab to the right of the line. select Multiple. 36 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim.28 Click Modify. and then click to select them. 30 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. press Tab to highlight the chain of lines. 31 On the Options Bar. 29 Highlight one of the lines you just drew. and then click point 6 as the endpoint. 32 Click point 1 to specify it as the start point. 35 Draw a line from the end of the last copied boundary line down to the base of the slab. 33 Click the endpoint of the copied chain as the start point for the next chain. 34 Press Esc. 37 Select the small vertical line you just drew.

The boundary of the slab now matches the contour of the metal deck. and then select the side of the slab above the line. as shown. Drafting Detail Components | 357 . 45 Using the method learned previously. 43 Select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down. Create a floor component 42 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 39 Select the line between points 1 and 2. 41 Type ZF to zoom out. 40 Click Finish Region. and then press Esc. (Rectangle).38 Pan to the other end of the slab. 44 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ This represents the vinyl composition flooring. draw a rectangle on top of the filled region.

Create a detail group 46 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. draw wide detail lines as shown.. 48 Using the existing thin line as a guide. Modify the group origin point 53 In the drawing area. Notice that the origin point of the group is at the center. 52 In the Create Group dialog. press Tab to highlight the chain. 49 Click Modify. 358 | Chapter 15 Detailing .D. enter Flashing Membrane_F. and click OK. for Name. 50 Highlight one of the wide lines. 51 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group. select the Flashing Membrane group. and then click to select them. 54 Drag the origin point so that it snaps to the right endpoint of the detail lines. 47 Select Wide Lines from the Line Style drop-down. as shown.

61 Using the same method. 59 Press Spacebar 3 times to orient the component correctly. 58 Select Break Line from the Type Selector drop-down. Drafting Detail Components | 359 . Add breaklines 56 Type ZO to zoom out.55 Press Esc. 57 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component. add a breakline at the midpoint of the slab’s left edge. 60 Click the midpoint of the drain to specify the breakline location. as shown.

68 Select the top of the drain as the object to tag.62 Press Esc twice. and then click OK. and use the grips to resize the masking region. 69 Click twice to place the leader as shown.A1 Floor Drain W/O Waterproofing. 66 Select Keynote Text from the Type Selector drop-down. Add a keynote You begin annotating the detail components by adding a keynote for the floor drain object. 72 If necessary. 70 In the Keynotes dialog. select Division 22 ➤ 22 13 00 ➤ 22 13 16 ➤ 22 13 16. select the keynote and drag the text to the right. 64 Press Esc twice. Modify breakline boundaries 63 Select the left breakline. 360 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 71 Click Modify. select Leader and Free End. 65 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Keynote drop-down ➤ User. as shown. 67 On the Options Bar.

Drafting Detail Components | 361 . 78 Move the cursor to the left. and click to specify the second leader point. 79 Enter Adjustable Nickel Bronze Strainer with 4” Flange. 77 Move the cursor up and to the left. 75 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Right). and then click anywhere in the view to finish editing. 81 Select the text note. 74 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments. and click to specify the text insertion point. and use the drag controls to resize and move the text box as shown. 76 To select the leader start point. 73 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. click in the area indicated by the left arrow in the following image. 80 Press Esc twice.Add text notes You add text notes to continue annotating the view.

84 Using the following image as a guide. Add dimensions You add a dimension with multiple references. as shown.82 Continue annotating the detail. click to select the slab lines in the order indicated. 362 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 83 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned.

and then press Esc twice. 87 Drag Typical Floor Drain Detail from the Project Browser to the top center of the sheet.85 Click to the left of the slab to place the dimension line. open P103 . Place the detail on a sheet 86 In the Project Browser. 91 Close the file with or without saving it. 89 Select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down. 88 In the drawing area. Drafting Detail Components | 363 . and click to place it. select the view title.Plumbing Part Plans & Details. 90 Press Esc.

Click OK. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_05_i. For Layers. For Colors. 7 On the Imported Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Category. Modify the CAD drawing line weight 5 Zoom to the left side of the detail. Click Open. 3 In the Import CAD Formats dialog: ■ Navigate to Training\Imperial\06_Construction Documentation.dwg. select Auto-Detect. select Black and White. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select 3. double-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Plumbing ➤ Drafting Views (Detail) ➤ Roof Drain Overflow Detail to make it the active view. For Import units. expand Roof Drains Overflow Imperial.Importing a CAD Drawing In this exercise. and modify line weight properties in the imported drawing. 6 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. Import a CAD detail drawing 1 In the Project Browser. ■ ■ ■ ■ 4 Type ZF to zoom the view.rvt. for Line Weight. and select Roof Drain Overflow Imperial. 364 | Chapter 15 Detailing . select Visible. 2 Click Insert tab ➤ Import panel ➤ Import CAD. For A-----NPP. you import a CAD detail drawing.

Plumbing Part Plans & Details.8 Type ZF. Place the detail on a sheet 9 In the Project Browser. open P103 . 10 Drag Roof Drain Overflow Detail from the Project Browser to the upper right of the sheet. 15 Close the file with or without saving it. 14 Drag the title to the small space below the viewport. and select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down. select the viewport title. 12 In the drawing area. Importing a CAD Drawing | 365 . 13 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel. 11 Press Esc. and then press Esc.

366 .